JP6757342B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a game in which identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then displays a result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game advantageous to the player. Regarding a game machine that generates a state.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a display device provided in the game area is based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). It is possible to store up to a predetermined number of start-up memories, which is the right to execute a variable display game. Further, there is known a device provided with a movable effect device for appearing on the front side of the display device by operation to produce a game. In a device provided with such a movable effect device, it is common to perform an initial operation as a process when the power is turned on (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-73326

If a power failure occurs during the execution of the variable display game, even if the power failure is restored, the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be executed immediately, but if this effect operation cannot be executed for a long period of time, There is a risk that the interest of the game will decline. An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In the game machine
A game control means that comprehensively controls the game,
An effect control means that controls the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means,
It is provided with a movable effect device capable of executing an effect operation that is controlled by the effect control means and operates a movable effect member according to the progress of the game.
The game control means
With the end of the variation display, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control means, and at the same time,
A fanfare command is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the special game state.
Information can be retained even in a power failure state, and the game can be resumed based on the information retained when the power failure is restored.
The effect control means
It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the recovery from the power failure.
The game control means
If a power failure occurs during the execution of the game, the game is interrupted, and if the power failure is restored, the game is restarted.
The effect control means
If the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, and the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the recovery of the power failure is completed by the time the stop command is received, the stop command is used. After the reception of, the effect of the movable effect device is set to be in an operable state.
When the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, which is the special result, the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the recovery of the power failure is from the reception of the stop command to the fanfare command. If the operation is completed before the reception, the movable effect device is set to be in an operable state after the reception of the fanfare command .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rear component member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the central movable accessory unit, which is (a) a front view and (b) a back view. It is a figure explaining the operation of the central movable accessory unit, which is (a) a front view and (b) a back view. It is a front view of the special variable winning device. It is a top view of the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the operation of an opening / closing member, and is (a) a closed state, (b) an open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device. It is a back view of the front wall member. It is a figure which shows the rear wall member, is (a) front view, (b) back view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main body part. It is a view from the left which explains the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state, (b) an open state. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing member, is (a) top view, (b) front view. (A) is a front view of the opening / closing member unit, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA. It is a bottom view explaining the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning apparatus, (a) top view, (b) perspective view seen from the right. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning apparatus, and is the perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variable winning device, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of a game ball when opening an opening / closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 2. (A) is a flowchart explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit end processing. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during fluctuation of the normal map, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process transition setting process during display of the normal map. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in the ordinary figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal electric remaining ball processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the end processing transition setting processing for each normal drawing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the end process per normal figure, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the normal process transition setting process 2 for the normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port signal editing process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of the state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the round effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the interval effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the information used in the setting of an initial operation. It is a figure which shows the state which each movable production device operates. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of power failure recovery. It is a flowchart explaining the effect operation permission process. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the operation correspondence effect at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial operation table. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial operation table. It is a figure explaining the alternative initial operation. It is a flowchart explaining operation substitution processing. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical display. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical display. It is a flowchart explaining the numerical display update process. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical display. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical display. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of a character effect. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process in 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process in another example of the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the single-shot command processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the return operation process in 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the operating range of the movable effect device in 4th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a taxiway 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31). Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is located on the lower right side of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and the second special figure changing display that give the start conditions of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) are given. A winning device 90 is provided with a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 can rotate about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction of tilting changes depending on the weight of the inflowing game ball, and the first starting winning opening 36 on the left side and the second winning opening 36 on the right side. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball winning the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31), and the game ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 31). Detected by. Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right so that a game ball can easily flow in, and the movable member 37b is always present. It is kept in a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and a game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the game ball flowing downward is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory, which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game. It is provided with a second information display unit that displays the number of. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the 1st special figure variable display game is displayed by the 4th symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the 1st to 3rd symbols on the display device 41. The decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Display A fourth information display unit for displaying a game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column form the first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column form the second information display unit. Further, one lower light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and one lower light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and a design is provided around each information display unit so that the two light emitting members are related to each other. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. Further, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed so that they can be seen to be independent of each other. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so as not to spoil the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not affixed with a sticker or the like, but is molded into a member constituting the guide portion 616, which can reduce labor and cost during manufacturing.

Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is installed. The details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, but depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 990 is closed from the closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening / closing member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 31) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small hit game state (second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined value. The game value (prize ball) is given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to reach the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. By launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), you can aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. It has become.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a prize is given to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the general figure start gate 34, which form a special figure variable display game. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game as a trigger and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. It is provided with a special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for games and various displays composed of LED lamps. The various indicators include a special figure 1 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device is opened and closed), a first game status display unit that notifies whether the time is shortened (during normal electric support, during a specific game state), left. A second game status display unit is included to notify the player of the hit (normal hit) and right hit, which is advantageous to the player (the hit method corresponding to the game state). In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a normal map variation display game. Includes a normal map display for the game and a normal map hold display for notifying the start memory of the game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 variable display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variable display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variable display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 variable display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variable display game.

During the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, the normal map display repeats the normal map fluctuation display in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the normal map variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the normal map fluctuation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (normal map, normal symbol) for displaying the normal map variation display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second start memories (second hold number), which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The normal figure hold display displays the number of normal figure start memories (the number of normal figure hold), which is the execution right of the normal figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units.

When the round display unit is not in the special game state, all the light emitting units are turned off, and during the special game state, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. The first game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur, and the time reduction state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (normal hitting), and is more than left-handed. When right-handed is more advantageous for the player (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

Next, the details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40, and is a game board. A rear component 700 to which various members necessary for 30 are attached is provided.

The front component 600 is attached to the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 by being fitted from the front side. This front component has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 and penetrates back and forth, and is formed with a peripheral wall 611 forming a front side portion of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. A plate-shaped collar-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611 is provided.

The portion of the mounting portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 from the front side. It extends outward from the peripheral edge, and its back surface comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front-rear position of the front component 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612 so that the front component 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface thereof is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is formed with screw holes, screwed portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

A regulation wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610, except for a portion where a stage portion 620, a warp flow path forming member 614, and a normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, are arranged. The regulation wall 613 is forward of the mounting portion 612 by the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is designed to be extended. Therefore, by attaching the front component 600 to the predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 located on the front side of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. It is designed to regulate the inflow into the case 40. As a result, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured, and the number of inflows of game balls into the stage unit 620 is limited.

Further, a warp flow forming a warp flow path that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides it to the stage portion 620 on the side portion on the left side when viewed from the front surface side of the base member 610. A road forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the mounting portion 612, and has a front-rear width of the game area 32 with respect to the mounting portion 612 (a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 from the front of the game board main body 80). The width to the back side of the glass) extends forward. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the regulation wall 613 attached so as to extend forward from the attachment portion 612 on the left side portion when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a tubular flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. It is possible to accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32. This upstream end forms the inflow port of the warp flow path. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball flowing in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. Then, the downstream end portion opens rearward, and the game ball is guided to the left end portion of the stage portion 620.

The stage portion 620 is capable of rolling the game ball back and forth and left and right, and both the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central portion directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 projects upward, but is lower than both the left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp flow path flows into the stage portion 620 from the left end and rolls in the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball that bounces below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, inclined surfaces 621 that descend forward are formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the central portion that protrudes upward. The inclined surface 621 guides the game ball whose flow force is weakened on the stage portion 620 from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the game region 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow path 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward extends at the apex of the central portion protruding upward. It is formed. This flow path 622 has a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow path 622 is guided backward and flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into an induction flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620. The induction flow path 623 is a flow path that descends forward, and the downstream end is located directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, so that the guide flow path 623 flows into the winning device 90 with a high probability.

Further, on the right side when viewed from the front side of the front component 600, a normal drawing start gate 34 through which a game ball can pass up and down is provided. The start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, a normal variable winning device 37 including a movable member 37b is provided below the normal drawing start gate 34. The game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component 600 and flows into a discharge flow path (not shown). Further, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a normal electric solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and a game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the game ball that flows downward on the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 that opens forward, and the rear base member 710 has screw holes and screws. Stops, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, etc. are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a collar-shaped fixing portion 713 extending outwardly perpendicular to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is designated on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 penetrating back and forth is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. The through hole 715 makes the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 visible.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. By attaching the display device 41 so that the display surface faces the front side, the image of the display surface can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with the liquid crystal display device, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

The lower movable accessory unit 730, the upper movable accessory unit 800, and the central movable accessory unit form the board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device that produces a game by operating inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710. A unit 880 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged below the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 that imitate a nobori and a second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd. The 1 lower movable member 740, 741 and the 2nd lower movable member 770 can be operated so as to appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged on the front side as a base portion to which a drive mechanism and various members for operating the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are attached. It includes a base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 arranged in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 arranged on the back surface side.

The motor 734, which is a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right side when viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is installed along the line. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, which are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 that can rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction and a second gear 737 that meshes with the first gear 735 and can rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. It is transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and the first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward on the front side. It is provided to do so.

Further, a first light-shielding plate 739 is provided on the outer periphery of the first gear 735 so as to extend in the radial direction. The first light-shielding plate 739 can be detected by a first detection sensor 781 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the first gear 735. The first detection sensor 781 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. The output is output, and the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detection unit is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the first light shielding plate 739 provided on the first gear 735 moves.

Further, the second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and the second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back surface side. It is provided in. As will be described later, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 drive the motor 734 in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the first drive shaft 736 and operates. When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second drive shaft 738. Is configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 is provided with a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and the bearing portion 742 is provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and is a rotation shaft 751 along the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 also has a bearing portion 743 at the lower end portion, and the bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotation shaft 752 along the front-rear direction provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. It is bearing as possible. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740, which is pivotally supported by the left rotating shaft 751 when viewed from the front, are doubled in the front-rear direction, and the driving force from the motor 734 is provided by the front gear. Is supposed to receive. Then, the gear on the rear side transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and one motor 734 is used to transmit the driving force to the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate at the same time.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740, which is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front, is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-rear direction. It meshes with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided on the upper portion of a slide member 760 which is slidably provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 with respect to the second lower base portion 732. By moving the slide member 760 to the left and right, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-shaped member, and the plate surface is arranged along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, and a support shaft that protrudes forward and is formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 on the supported portion 762. By inserting the 754, it is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760, so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to fall forward.

Further, the slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating back and forth. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end portion of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front surface side. A first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted into the through hole 763 from the rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion between the arcuate portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 763 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. Further, in the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are in the initial positions in this way, the first light-shielding plate 739 is retracted from the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the detection result by the first detection sensor 781 is ON. (See FIGS. 5 and 7 (a)).

When the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side from this initial state, the first drive shaft 736 moves the straight portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, so that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward. The display device 41 appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is the opposite of the above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, from the initial state, the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side to move the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the initial position, so that the first light-shielding plate 739 becomes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The detection result of the first detection sensor 781 is turned off. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in a range in which the state of invading the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial positions, and the first detection is performed. Based on the fact that the sensor 781 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial positions. That is, the first detection sensor 781 serves as a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are movable effect devices forming the board effect device 44, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 form the initial positions. It forms a production accessory switch 47 that detects the presence in.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 is provided with a rotation shaft 771 along the front-rear direction at the lower end, and the rotation shafts are the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. It is rotatably supported by. Further, in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771, a linear through hole 772 penetrating back and forth is formed. The through hole 772 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending from the left end portion of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front surface side in the state shown in FIG. A second drive shaft 738 provided in the second gear 737 is inserted into the through hole 772 from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

Further, a second light-shielding plate 773 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft is provided at a position in the vicinity of the rotating shaft 771 and facing the through hole 772 with the rotating shaft 771 interposed therebetween. The second light-shielding plate 773 can be detected by a second detection sensor 782 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the second lower movable member 770. The second detection sensor 782 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. The output is output, and the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detection unit is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the second light shielding plate 773 provided on the second lower movable member 770 moves.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion between the arcuate portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 772 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

In this state, the first light-shielding plate 739 is retracted from the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned on. Further, the second light-shielding plate 773 is retracted from the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned on. Based on the fact that both the first detection sensor 781 and the second detection sensor 782 are in the ON state in this way, in the effect control device 300, both the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are in the initial positions. It is possible to grasp that it is the initial state in.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so that the second gear 737 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward and the through hole 772 Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial state, the operation is the opposite of the above.

Further, when the second lower movable member 770 operates from the initial position, the second light-shielding plate 773 invades the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned off. The second light-shielding plate 773 is provided in a range in which the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position is maintained in the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is provided. Based on the fact that is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. That is, the operating state of the second lower movable member 770 can be detected from the detection result of the second detection sensor 782, and the position of the second lower movable member 770 forming the movable effect device can be detected by the second detection sensor 782. It serves as a position detecting means and also serves as an effect switch 47 for detecting that the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position.

When the second lower movable member 770 is operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7A, and is in the state shown in FIG. 7B. It becomes. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in a range such that the state of not invading the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained in this process, and the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state. Of course, in the process of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position, the operation is opposite to this, so that the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.

Further, as described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 is not pressed and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

As described above, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated from the initial positions, the first gear 735 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7A. As a result, the first shading plate 739 invades the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned off. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in a range in which the state of invading the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial positions, and the first detection is performed. Based on the fact that the sensor 781 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in a state where the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display for emphasizing the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect may be displayed in the same manner even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion of the second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd, and can be decorated by light emission. In addition, the letters "De Arca" are also emitted. Each of these four characters emits light independently, but for "ru", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light more independently. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8, only the "de" part and the "re" part in "le" can be made to emit light and displayed as "dere". There is. By dividing the characters and making it possible to display different information in this way, it is possible to perform a novel effect. It should be noted that the display of "dere" notifies that the dere mode is one of the plurality of production modes. By notifying the effect mode by the display on the movable member in this way, it is possible to convey the set effect mode to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 9, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 that imitates a tiger's hand, and these first upper movable members 848 and first 2 The effect is produced by operating the upper movable member 860.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 that can move in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. .. The base member 801 has a U-shape when viewed from the front side, and the upper base portion 802 arranged above the through hole 715 and the left base portion arranged to the left when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715. It is composed of 803 and a right base portion 804 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a drive mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down. Of the drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down, the drive mechanism 806 that operates on the left side when viewed from the front side is referred to as a movable member unit (left), and the drive mechanism 806 that operates on the right side is movable. Sometimes referred to as a member unit (right).

Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820, and by driving the motor 807, the link member 830 can be operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 arranged on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A first drive unit (not shown) that is arranged on the back surface side of the unit 841 to drive the first upper movable member, a second drive unit (not shown) that drives the second upper movable member, and the back surface of the unit base unit 841. The guided member 842 is fixed to the left base portion 803 and guided by the guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link member 830 is rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and is arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 is a rotation shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 that extends forward along the front-rear direction, or a rotation shaft provided on the right base portion 804 that extends forward along the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which the 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is rotatably supported by a left base portion 803 or a right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole through which a drive shaft 809 provided in the arm of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and drives the motor 807 to rotate the arm. The drive shaft 809 rotates the link member 830 up and down while moving along the first guide portion 832.

A third light-shielding plate 835 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided in the vicinity of the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 pivotally supported by the left base portion 803. The third light-shielding plate 835 can be detected by the third detection sensor 811 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the left base portion 803. The third detection sensor 811 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. The output is output, and the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detection unit is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the third light shielding plate 835 moves.

A fourth light-shielding plate 836 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided in the vicinity of the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 pivotally supported by the right base portion 804. The fourth light-shielding plate 836 can be detected by the fourth detection sensor 812 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the right base portion 804. The fourth detection sensor 812 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. The output is output, and the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detection unit is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the fourth light-shielding plate 836 moves.

Further, a connecting shaft for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend rearward at the other end portion of the link member 830 facing the one end portion provided with the bearing portion 831. There is. Further, the link member 830 has a second guide portion 834 which is a long hole through which a support shaft provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. Is formed, and the second guide portion 834 guides and supports one end of the second upper movable member 860.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion to the left and right. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion which is an elongated hole extending to the left and right through the front and rear, and the connecting shaft of the link member 830 is slidably connected to the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, a guided member 842 is attached to the back surface of the unit base portion 841. The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and is guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 at the left and right ends. 843 is provided.

Further, a circular first upper movable member 848 is provided on the front side of the main body portion. In the first upper movable member 848, a rotation shaft provided in the center of the back surface in the front-rear direction is rotatably supported by a main body portion, and the rotation shaft is rotationally driven by the first drive portion. It is designed to rotate around a rotation axis. The first drive unit is provided with a fifth detection sensor that detects that the rotatable first upper movable member 848 is in the initial position.

In addition, the second drive unit provided in the main body can drive the second upper movable member 860 independently of the first upper movable member 848. The second drive unit includes a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860, and the drive arm 853 can be swung left and right. A second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and by swinging the drive arm 853 left and right, the second upper movable member 860 swings left and right. Further, the second drive unit is provided with an eighth detection sensor that detects that the swingable second upper movable member 860 is in the initial position.

9 to 11 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. Some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 9 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is in the initial position at the upper end of the operating range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also in the initial positions. Further, in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, but the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are in the operating state at the initial positions. Further, FIG. 11 shows an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also operating from the initial positions.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 9, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. In this state, the third shading plate 835 is located at the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811, and the fourth shading plate 836 is located at the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection are performed. All sensors 812 are turned off. In addition, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are also turned off. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state and the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm is rotated toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 rotates downward and the movable member unit 820 moves. Move down. Then, in the operating state where the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end of the rotating range and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end of the rotating range as shown in FIG. ing.

Further, in this state, the third light-shielding plate 835 is retracted from the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811, and the fourth light-shielding plate 836 is retracted from the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812, so that the third detection sensor 811 and the third are retracted. All 4 detection sensors 812 are turned on. Since the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial positions, both the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are turned off.

That is, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the movable member unit 820 is in the initial position based on the fact that both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are OFF. Therefore, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form a production accessory switch 47 that detects the initial position of the movable member unit 820 forming the board effect device 44. Further, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 serve as a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the movable member unit 820 forming the movable effect device.

Here, the state in which both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are OFF continues to the extent that the movable member unit 820 operates slightly from the initial position, but the third light-shielding plate 835 and the fourth light-shielding plate 835 and the fourth light-shielding sensor 812 continue to be OFF. By adjusting the range in which the plate 836 is provided, it is possible to turn on both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 in a state where the movable member unit 820 is slightly operated from the initial position. ..

When the first drive unit is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the fifth detection sensor is turned on until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. The first upper movable member 848 can be driven in either clockwise or counterclockwise direction. Further, when the second drive unit is operated, the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. 10, and from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. It repeats moving left and right with the distant state. The eighth detection sensor is ON until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. That is, the fifth detection sensor serves as a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first upper movable member 848 forming the movable effect device, and the effect accessory switch that detects that the first upper movable member 848 is in the initial position. Make 47. Further, the eighth detection sensor serves as a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the second upper movable member 860 forming the movable effect device, and the effect accessory switch for detecting that the second upper movable member 860 is in the initial position. Make 47.

That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms the first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body. , And these constitute the first effect device. Further, the second upper movable member 860 forms a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 forms a second drive mechanism unit for operating the second effect movable body. The second production device is configured.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at both the initial position shown in FIG. 9 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11, and operates in a state of covering the link member 830. It has become like. By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 that operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830, and simply the operation. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a decorative member. Further, especially at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 covers the link member 830 so as not to be visible to the player. As a result, unnecessary parts cannot be seen by the player in the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the decorativeness is improved.

From the above, the game machine 10 that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result controls the effect related to the game. The effect control means (effect control device 300), the first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and the second effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) that are controlled by the effect control means and operate to produce an effect related to the game. The first effect device includes a first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and includes an effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850). A second effect movable body including a first drive mechanism unit (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device can perform a predetermined effect operation. (Second upper movable member 860) and a second drive mechanism unit (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body are provided, and the second effect movable body covers the first drive mechanism unit. It will be arranged.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism unit, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism unit with the second effect movable body that operates in particular, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the first drive mechanism unit. , A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a non-moving decorative member.

Further, in the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860), the first drive mechanism unit (link member 830) plays a game in a state where at least the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is in the initial position. It is covered so that it cannot be seen by anyone. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates so that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. It is a production.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 arranged and operated on the upper front surface of the movable effect base member 881, and the third arranged and operated on the lower front surface of the movable effect base member 881. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

In the movable effect base member 881, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41. In this portion, the operation of the first rotating shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guide portion 883, which is an elongated hole penetrating the front and rear for the purpose, is provided. Further, a second rotating shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the second central movable effect member, and front and rear for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member. A second guide portion 885, which is an elongated hole penetrating the hole, is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Further, a sixth detection sensor 889 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located on the upper side of the display device 41. The sixth detection sensor 889 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. Is output. On the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 attached to the front side of this portion, a sixth light-shielding plate 916 extending rearward is provided, and the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection unit of the sixth detection sensor 889 are provided. The gap is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the sixth shading plate 916 moves.

Further, in the movable effect base member 881, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located below the display device 41. In this portion, the operation of the third rotating shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guide portion 892, which is an elongated hole penetrating the front and rear for the purpose, is provided. Further, the fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and the front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member. A fourth guide portion 894, which is an elongated hole penetrating the hole, is provided. A motor forming a drive source for operating the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. 895 is provided.

Further, a seventh detection sensor 897 is provided in the center of a portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. The seventh detection sensor 897 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval. The light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to generate an ON signal. Is output. On the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 attached to the front side of this portion, a seventh light-shielding plate 926 extending rearward is provided, and the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion in the detection portion of the seventh detection sensor 897 are provided. The gap is arranged so as to be located on the circumference on which the seventh shading plate 926 moves.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged on the upper right side includes a decorative portion 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, a first bearing portion 902 is provided which penetrates before and after the first rotation shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is the first. It is rotatably supported around a moving shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first fan-shaped gear 903 and a second fan-shaped gear 904 centered on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first fan-shaped gear 903 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through a penetrating portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating the front and rear. There is. Then, the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with the gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886.

Further, the second sector gear 904 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second fan-shaped gear 904 meshes with a third fan-shaped gear 913 provided on the second central movable effect member 910 arranged adjacent to the left side of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first fan-shaped gear 903 is transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second fan-shaped gear 904. Further, on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900, a guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883, and when the first central movable effect member 900 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883. This enables the smooth operation of the first central movable effect member 900.

The second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left portion includes a decorative portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, a second bearing portion 912 is provided which penetrates before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted, and the second central movable effect member 910 is the second. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third fan-shaped gear 913 centered on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third fan-shaped gear 913 meshes with the second fan-shaped gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is inserted through the second guide portion 885, and when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885. This enables the smooth operation of the second central movable effect member 910.

Further, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912. The engaging portion 915 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through the penetrating portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating the front and rear. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 13B, one end of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is urged upward. It has become like. As a result, the urging force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the operating range, and downwards. The operated first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 assist in returning to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 12, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left portion includes a decorative portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, a third bearing portion 922 is provided which penetrates before and after the third rotation shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is the third. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a fan-shaped fourth fan-shaped gear 923 and a fifth fan-shaped gear 924 centered on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth fan-shaped gear 923 meshes with the gear of the motor 895 arranged at the lower left of the third rotation shaft 891 of the movable effect base member 881.

Further, the fifth fan-shaped gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth fan-shaped gear 924 meshes with the sixth fan-shaped gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth fan-shaped gear 923 is transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth fan-shaped gear 924. Further, on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is inserted through the third guide portion 892, and when the third central movable effect member 920 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892. This enables the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right portion includes a decorative portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a fourth bearing portion 932 is provided which penetrates before and after the fourth rotation shaft 893 is inserted, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is the fourth. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth fan-shaped gear 933 and a seventh fan-shaped gear 934 centered on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth fan-shaped gear 933 meshes with the fifth fan-shaped gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. Further, on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 935 is inserted through the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894. This enables the smooth operation of the fourth central movable effect member 930.

Further, the seventh sector gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh fan-shaped gear 934 meshes with the eighth fan-shaped gear 942 provided in the urging mechanism 940 arranged at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The urging mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction and includes an eighth fan-shaped gear 942. The urging mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left side from the rotation axis when viewed from the front side, and is urged downward (counterclockwise) by an urging member (not shown). As a result, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operating range. Therefore, the urging force by the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 in the initial position, and also assists the third central movable effect member 920 and the third central movable effect member 920 that have moved upward. The fourth central movable effect member 930 assists when returning to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into the initial state shown in FIG. 13 and the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 13, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are at the initial positions which are the upper ends of the operating range, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Is at the initial position at the lower end of the operating range, and is in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the substantially display device 41.

In this initial state, the sixth shading plate 916 is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result by the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned off. Further, the 7th light-shielding plate 926 is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the 7th detection sensor 897, and the detection result by the 7th detection sensor 897 is turned off. That is, in the initial state, both the 6th detection sensor 889 and the 7th detection sensor 897 are turned off. Based on this, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions. ..

Since the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are interlocked with each other, the second central movable effect member 910 is in the initial position according to the detection result by the sixth detection sensor 889. It is also possible to detect that the first central movable effect member 900 is in the initial position by detecting. Further, since the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are interlocked with each other, the third central movable effect member 920 is in the initial position according to the detection result by the seventh detection sensor 897. It is also possible to detect that the fourth central movable effect member 930 is in the initial position by detecting. Therefore, in the effect control device 300, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member are based on the fact that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF. It is possible to grasp that the 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 rotate so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise. Along with this, the sixth shading plate 916 is retracted from the detection unit of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result by the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned ON. Further, the 7th light-shielding plate 926 is retracted from the detection unit of the 7th detection sensor 897, and the detection result by the 7th detection sensor 897 is turned ON. That is, the effect control device 300 is based on the fact that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, and the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 910. It is possible to grasp that the 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

Therefore, the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 form the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member forming the board effect device 44. It serves as a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the member 930, and also serves as an effect switch 47 for detecting the initial position.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 14, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth center. The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end faces of the respective decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 face each other and approach the end faces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, and form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each decorative portion 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material that does not transmit light, and the portion where the decorative portion 901, 911, 921, 931 is located is in a state in which the display of the display device 41 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 15 to 17, the special variation winning device 38 is arranged on the flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962. It is sandwiched between the flow path front wall 952 and provided with a flow path 38f through which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a row toward the left.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow path 38f is composed of an opening / closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (a), the opening / closing member 990 protrudes forward and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d), and FIG. 17 (b). As shown in the above, it is possible to evacuate to the rear and convert it into an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening 38d. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, passes through the large winning opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It is designed to flow into the big prize opening. When the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special variation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, and a main body 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached. A cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body 970 is provided.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partly capable of transmitting light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decorative means, and it is possible to decorate the special variable winning device 38 with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the batch display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 16, a plurality of front wall projecting portions 954 projecting rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952. The front wall protrusion 954 is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is slightly upstream of the protrusion 992 in front of each of the plurality of protrusions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990. It is provided so as to be located in. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. By locating the front wall protrusion 954 slightly upstream, the game ball flowing down to the left is guided backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further backward by the protrusion 992. It is designed to effectively guide the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the back surface side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 are provided. The function of this extension wall 953 is different depending on the place where it is provided, and the bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f, the large winning opening opening forming portion 953b forming the side wall and the bottom surface of the large winning opening 38d, and the large winning opening A guide flow path forming portion 953c that forms a guide flow path 955 that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d that forms a mounting portion 956 that mounts a large winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 are formed. It has a function as a general winning opening forming portion 953e and a peripheral wall 953f for preventing the game ball flowing down around the special variable winning device 38 from entering the inside.

The bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f is an inclined surface inclined to the right side when viewed from the back surface side. Further, the large winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the large winning opening 38d into the guide flow path 955. Game balls can flow into the guide flow path 955 in a row, and a large winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion into the guide flow path 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 38d will flow into the induction flow path 955 after being detected by the large winning opening switch 38a. The guidance flow path 955 formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 953c is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the grand prize opening 38d to the back surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is rearward on the back surface of the front surface portion 951. Ribs 957 are formed to guide to. Further, the general winning opening forming portion 953e forms a general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning device 38. A rib 958 for guiding the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 35 backward is formed on the back surface of the front surface portion 951.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 38f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating the front and rear for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear wall protruding portion 964 is a triangular columnar protruding portion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the flow path 38f in the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball can be reliably provided. It becomes possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 20, the guide flow path 955 communicates with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 at the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the guide flow path 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating back and forth is formed in. Further, above the guide flow path 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed which penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, on the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 on which the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is moved to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening flow path 966 to be guided to the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 20B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. The function of the extending wall 967 is different depending on the place where the extension wall 967 is provided. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c forming the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide flow path forming portion 967a forms the guide flow path 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back surface side downward. Further, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed on the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening flow path forming portion 967b forms the general winning opening flow path 966 so as to guide the game ball guided downward from the penetrating portion 966a to the back surface side. Further, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed to match the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates the front and rear formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the special variable winning device 38 is attached, and attaches the special variable winning device 38 to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main body portion 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 that faces the guide flow path forming portion 967a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms the rear wall of the guide flow path 955. In the rear wall portion 972, at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, a game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is introduced into the guiding flow path 955. A rib 973 that guides to the right along the line is formed. Further, in the rear wall portion 972, a penetration portion 974 penetrating back and forth is formed at a position facing the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The game ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 955 is guided backward by the rib 969 formed in the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, and is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 to the outside of the game machine. Is designed to flow into the discharge channel.

Further, in the portion of the rear wall member 960 facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966, a game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. Part 975 is formed. The game ball flowing down the general winning port flow path 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then discharged to the outside of the game machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

Further, an opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the front and rear of the main body portion 970, and can come into contact with the upper, lower, left and right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990, and can guide and support the opening / closing member 990. The guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening / closing member unit 980 including an opening / closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990.

The opening / closing member unit 980 is in a state in which the opening / closing member 990 is projected forward as shown in FIG. 22 (a) and the special variation winning device 38 is closed, and as shown in FIG. 22 (b). The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the member 990 is retracted rearward and a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the large winning opening 38d via the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening / closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 23A, the opening / closing member 990 is formed as a flow path forming portion 991 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f by lowering the front end portion extending upward of the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface. ing.

A plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward are formed in the flow path forming portion 991 near the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right can be smoothly guided backward toward the recess 993. Further, the downstream side surface of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that when the game ball flowing forward from the recess 993 comes into contact, the side surface can be guided in the downstream direction.

Further, a recess 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is one step lower and faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the concave portion 993 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is set so that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed diagonally so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the recess 993. There is.

That is, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as a protrusion 992 and a recess 993. As will be described later, such undulations allow the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for a long time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an oblique surface that descends to the left side, so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the opening / closing member 990 is placed on the holding portion 982 by contacting the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 has an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this way, when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, when a game ball exists between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, the game ball is moved upward. Alternatively, the game ball can be released downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a connecting portion 995 to which a drive arm 983 for transmitting a driving force from the large winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is connected is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 24B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a penetrating portion 982a through which a connecting pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connecting pin 983a is an opening / closing member through the penetrating portion 982a. It is connected to the connection portion 995 of the 990. Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b located on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extending along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 along the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 25, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotation shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and is rotatable about the rotation shaft 983b. The rotation shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 and is rotatably held (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 25A, when the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is located at the front end of the rotation range. .. In this state, the drive arm 983 is most rotated clockwise when viewed from the back surface side with the rotation shaft 983b as the center, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variable winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is retracted so that the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back side with the rotation shaft 983b as the center. Rotating in the direction, the connecting pin 983a is moved rearward to retract the opening / closing member 990 rearward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the special variable winning device 38 is opened. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the operation opposite to the above operation is performed.

26 to 29 show the flow mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device 38. In addition, in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The game ball flowing down the flow path 38f from right to left is first guided diagonally forward by the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided diagonally backward by the front wall protruding portion 954 and diagonally rearward by the protruding portion 992 of the opening / closing member 990, and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is guided diagonally forward again by the downstream side surface of the recess 993 formed diagonally toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

After that, the guidance diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and the guidance diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f meanders back and forth. It will flow down while. As a result, the time to stay on the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows down linearly. It will be. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (a), the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short. At that time, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 will fall and win the grand prize opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player will win the prize. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for. It is preferable to secure the time required for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 with respect to the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the round of short opening. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 30A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the protruding portion 992 formed in the opening / closing member 990. As shown in 30 (b), it bounces and is guided away from the grand prize opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the grand prize opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall through the intervals without contacting the protrusions 992. The opening time of the special variable winning device 38 in the case of short opening, which will be described later, is a time during which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protrusion 992 or the like can flow into the large winning opening 38d as described above. ing. As a result, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the large winning opening 38d.

By providing the protruding portion 992, the front wall protruding portion 954, and the rear wall protruding portion 964 in this way, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The flow path 38f is provided with a front wall protrusion 954, a rear wall protrusion 964, a protrusion 992, and a recess 993 as undulations, but other than these may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation, and the game ball may meander and flow down along the groove. Further, as undulations, rib-shaped protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the flow direction, so that when the game ball flows down, it flows down while being moved in the vertical direction by the protrusions and grooves. You can do it.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). A game in which a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball in 97) is executed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine is provided with a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. , The opening and closing member that allows the game ball to win from the opening facing upward, closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball in the closed state, and opens the opening to enable the winning of the game ball in the open state. The 990 is provided so that the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portion 992, recess 993) on the upper surface, as compared with the case where there is no such undulation. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, around the flow path 38f formed by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, contact portions (front wall protrusion 954, rear wall protrusion 964) are provided so that the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Will be there. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 for a long time, and the decrease of the game ball during the special game state can be suppressed, which enhances the interest of the game. it can.

Further, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right ends on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 to the other, and the undulations formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 move the flowing game ball back and forth. It will be formed to meander. Therefore, the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. However, in the closed state, the upper surface is parallel so as to cover the large winning opening 38d, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened. May be configured to rotate downward.

Further, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which a game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In a game machine that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The special variable winning device 38 is provided, which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. A game ball can be won from the facing opening, and in the closed state, it protrudes forward to close the opening, making it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state, it retracts backward and opens the opening to win the game ball. An opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided so as to enable the game ball to flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening / closing member 990 is undulating on the upper surface (projection portion 992). , Recess 993) is provided so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 for a longer time than when there is no undulation, and the opening / closing member 990 faces the front end portion. Therefore, an inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced.

Therefore, since the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member for a longer time than when there is no undulation, the game ball in the special gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of games and enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, which enhances the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock variation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (short-time operation state (normal power support state)), the number of start-up memories, etc., and one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Select and acquire the variation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32 V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and an information display device 630. , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided. In addition, a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) is provided. In the game machine of the present embodiment, as the board effect device 44, the first lower movable member 740, 741, the second lower movable member 770, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, the first 1 Central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, and 4th central movable effect member 930 are provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 detects the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect accessory switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPReSET signal), the sound source LSI314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) that drives and controls the lamp, motor, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , 1st start winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 from the game area 32. It is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning openings is increased according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball driven into the inside passes through the start gate 34, the gate switch 34a detects it. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal figure start prizes is displayed on the normal figure hold display of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random number value (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal figure start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the game control device 100, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are set in advance on the display device provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined variation time as a process of executing the game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order of the above, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode on the solenoid display according to the type of hit is stopped. In addition to displaying the display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 is set. In addition to storing in the limit, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the prizes in the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Remember in. Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display of the batch display device 50, and also as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Is displayed. Further, it is also displayed on the information display device 630.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes ready to start the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The hit / miss determination of the special figure variation display game is performed by comparing the generated random value for jackpot determination with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) and the information display device 630 correspond to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, Displaying a variable display of decorative special figures (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) Performs processing to display the game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like on the display device 41 is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the information display device 630, the light emitting member blinks during the variation display, and when the stop time is reached, the light emitting member blinks the light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by the decorative special symbol (fourth symbol) composed of the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the information display device 630 is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game is entered into the large winning opening. Controls to allow the inflow of balls. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state of the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol, opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) for the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

In addition, the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained for one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 are not particularly limited. The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are non-contact to detect a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power failure are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) of the RAM, EEPROM, or the like (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), and it is normal. If (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 34, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 34 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 34, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and then a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a power failure recovery command, and a screen designation command (waiting for customers). If so, send multiple commands such as the command on the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise the command on the recovery screen). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, first, the model designation command is transmitted, and then the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, and the RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen is displayed). In addition to displaying the command, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. That is, the model designation command is first transmitted to the effect control device 300 both in the case of power failure recovery and when the RAM is initialized, and this model specification command is produced after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. This is the information that is first transmitted to the device 300.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, both are initialized. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, but as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 35 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 36 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number update process is completed.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there are also game machines in which the initial value random number of the winning symbol does not exist.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed to output the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a. In addition, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S110) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio wave fraud, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). After that, if there are unused bits in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is completed.

In addition, unused bit data and inverting bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.
Further, the inverted bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the inverted bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) until the second reading elapses (step S145).

When the delay time elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S149). After that, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is set as a confirmation bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second readings (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state of this time (step S154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state of this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Ends the switch read process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous read to generate a signal. There is a method of determining whether or not it has changed, but if this is done, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be possible. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is an output port for digit / external information output. Output to 136 (step S166).
After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, various indicators provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display, the special figure 1 hold display, and the special figure 2 hold. The display, the normal drawing hold display, the round display, and the second game status display are dynamically lit.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S170), and the combined data is combined. It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted data. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the prize number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball region before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number which is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with winning a game ball in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions under which the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the prize number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200. Therefore, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 42 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step S213). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). When the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal figure hit random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. In addition, when the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the hit symbol random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 43 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is "1", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is "2", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variable pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the game microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the DRAM, and instead. It has a built-in counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register, and loads the value of the M1 counter (step S234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, when the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this). Is set to the mask update value obtained by adding "1" to "masked value"), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. When the random number region is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S236; N). Step S238) and step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Proceed to step S242. When the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step). S243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1. It is saved in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number region is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of the present embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) are displayed on the effect random number update table. , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 44 shows the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is opened. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening and detect a normal winning.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information such as the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of times of monitoring repetition (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), monitor whether there is any illegal winning, and detect the normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, and general winning opening 35 winning opening switch 35a) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S307), and a winning opening is won. The winning number counter update process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter of is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a game machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Status monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", status monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the game machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the game machine determines the state such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed at a rate of once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball, and paying out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch for error monitoring is the large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening switch for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of the winning slot switch to be error-monitored, but the number of fraud occurrences is defined to be different for each type of winning slot switch. You can also do it. The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won after passing the mark or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (For example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step S327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning ball is performed. Do. Then, if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S334), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step S337), the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S338). If the value of the notification timer is not the moment when it becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 46 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308, S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch is checked. Determine (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether or not it overflows (step S355). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). Further, when an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not the value overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 47 shows the game machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this game machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning port switch / game machine status monitoring table prepared by the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, a lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, a lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and a signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error-type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), it is a state indicating that the error type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step S379; N). Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S381). Step S383).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the game machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S384) to prepare. The determined state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the game machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396). When the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). , It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). Further, when the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this process, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is difficult to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the payout control device 200 is continuously output with a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and the winning is given. Based on special figure variation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit medium processing. The small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. To do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port, which is the starting port in FIG. 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, in step A112, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not operating (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud has occurred when the number of fraudulent prizes in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that no fraudulent electric power is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure start port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) is prepared (step A116), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the third starting port, which is the starting port in FIG. 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third start port (step A118; N), the start port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, in step A118, when it is determined that there is a prize in the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and the effect command setting process (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize at the third starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting hold information by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special figure start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first start port (first start winning opening 36), the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning prize). Of the ports 97), the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A131), and the start port to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is set. It is determined whether or not the switch has an input (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A135). Then, of the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening of the monitored target is won. The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of times the winning start port switch to be monitored is won. The number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information about the game is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the number of outputs overflows. (Step A143).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the save is not performed.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process ends.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A145; Y). Step A146), prepare the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the target start port winning flag. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 is used as the RWM. Save in the jackpot random number storage area of (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the case of this embodiment) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A155 that the prize is won in the first starting port (step A155; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and the small hit symbol of RWM is extracted. Save in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the variable order flag storage area (any place from hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area is calculated. The variation order flag of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A159), the special figure hold information determination process (step A160) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is completed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the right to execute a variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first sets various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, which is the starting opening of FIG. 1, up to a predetermined number. The second start is stored as a start memory, and various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 and the ordinary variable winning device 37, which are the starting openings of the special figure 2, up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A160) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 53, first, a jackpot determination process (step A161) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A165).
If it is determined in step A165 that the prize is not won in the first starting port (step A165; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A165; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to the process of step A171.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is provided. It is acquired (step A169), and the process proceeds to step A171.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A172). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A174).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A176), the special figure reservation information determination process is completed. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A201). .. If the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step). A202).

If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the processing is being performed during the small hit (step A203). ). If the small hit middle process is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205. Then, "0" is set in the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch (step A206).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed. It is determined whether it is inside (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is won a large prize. It is added to the number of mouth counts (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning mouth counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A219). Step A220), it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221). When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are both “0” (step A301).
When it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for the total number of hold 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation shown in FIG. 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, the special figure 1 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A304, a command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorative special figure hold number command) is prepared.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is supported. The decorative special figure holding number command to be performed is prepared (step A307), the effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. At this point, the special figure 2 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A307, a command (decorative special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value is prepared.

Further, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A301; Y). In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and the effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, "0" for the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 56, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure is The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed hit flag 1 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A332). For example, 52 ms) is saved (step A333), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 56 for the second start memory. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure is shown. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 104 ms) is saved (step A353), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A364). The number of hold numbers 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A365) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A365) is a jackpot (step A366; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A362 (step A367). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A368) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A361. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A372). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing, and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of order. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A383).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 61 shows the small hit determination process (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the large hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). The small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of order, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in the special figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be the probability variation depending on whether or not the game state is in the probability variation. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning opening). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A173, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of the outlier when the number of hold is large. Therefore, in the case other than the outlier, the number of hold does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. In addition, the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and change pattern setting process (steps A174, A326, A346) at the special figure 2 change start will be described. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step). A472), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the hit rate is lower than the loss rate and even one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (step A474), and if it is out of order (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to perform step A477. Move to processing. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed to shift to the process of step A477.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 66 shows the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) of, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

In this sorting process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Checks if is an unsorted code (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is obtained. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is completed.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And the second half fluctuation selection table) and the first distribution value specified in the first half fluctuation selection table) are acquired (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).
Then, in step A2205, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2207), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 67 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.
On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new random number is generated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter. Perform processing.
That is, a new distribution value is obtained by acquiring the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) (step A2303), and then subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table).
Then, in step A2305, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 66 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 67 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Because they are different in that, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A327, A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the variation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the variation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include a variable command including information about the pattern and a stop information command including information about the extension of the stop time, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, "2" related to the special figure display processing is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Further, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2) is saved. (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that it is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 jackpot) starts. (For example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708). The round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). When it is determined that A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. (Turn on the signal per special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Save in the upper limit area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). A717) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudden probability))), and the big hit without a big hit (big winning opening). When the opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudden probability)), it turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is turned OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A726), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command is set. The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process (step) related to the effect mode setting. A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update processing (steps A726, A735) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (in a high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure has a high probability (step A751; Y), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether the time is shortened (step A752). Then, when the time is not shortened (step A752; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the time is being shortened (step A752; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A754).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A754; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is set to the test signal output data area. Save.

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A759). Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. In order to turn off the lights, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. ..

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , It is determined whether the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process ends.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782). The effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), and the effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), the effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is completed. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified number of rotations for switching the effect mode. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 1, first, the process number “3” related to the fanfare / in-interval process is set (step A791), and the process is performed in the special figure game process number area. Save the number (step A792).

Next, the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal is ON (output by big hit + small hit) and 4 big hit signals are ON (output by big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special The symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). Even in the high probability of the special figure, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so that the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, clear the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is turned off in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. (Step A799), and save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the remaining rotation speed area of the effect is cleared (step A804), and the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). .. Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit) is turned on. In order to make the game state display number 2, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process 1, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing. Save in the number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit output). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , The effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A907), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is completed.
When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A908), perform the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening, and end the fanfare / interval process.

Here, in the present embodiment, as jackpot patterns, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), and 4R probability variation (all short open) is set. The probability change is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, 16R probability change A data and open switching judgment value "0", 16R probability change B data and open switching judgment value "4", 16R normal A data and open switching judgment value "0", The 16R normal B data and the open switching determination value “4” and the 4R probability variation data and the open switching determination value “0” are stored in association with each other. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting processing]
FIG. 77 shows the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In this process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A911). Step A912). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the winning opening count area (step A914). Then, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, when it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the game state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). The interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening is being opened. End the process.

If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step). A1006), the interval command is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening opening processing is completed. To do.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. The ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the time is prepared (step A1009), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the grand prize opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed. The process is finished while the big winning opening is open.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening solenoid remains. End the ball processing transition setting processing.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move to the processing of. Further, when the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that the subsequent rounds will be short-open rounds. Specifically, as jackpot patterns, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B ( When any of 1 to 4R is long open and 5 to 16R is short open) is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the jackpot round, and at the 4th round. Execute the round continuous notification effect. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is notified that the long open will continue in the round continuous notification effect, and the big winning opening will be long open even in the 5th and subsequent rounds. It will be released at. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank-down effect is performed in the round continuous notification effect and the short open is achieved. This will be notified and the big prize opening will be opened with a short opening in the 5th and subsequent rounds.

If the large winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the remaining ball of the large winning opening. To finish.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area for storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step). A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A1113). After that, the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed to end the jackpot remaining ball processing.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 81 shows the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In this fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “3” related to the fanfare / in-interval process is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step). A1122).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The intermediate process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 82 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). After that, a signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is highly probable after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A1201).

If it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). ), The probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and the command setting process (step A1205) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1208), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and the command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 84 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1225), the time reduction fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the jackpot ends. The setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100 times) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1235), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period of time. It serves as a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 86 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , Condition device operating signal OFF, accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 hit signal OFF, special symbol 2 hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the small hit fanfare medium processing, the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, “8” related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is used as the special figure game processing. Save to the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1) is saved. The operating signal (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the initial small hit operation value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit medium processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit operation is performed. End the hit processing.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high probability of special figure. It is determined whether the flag is related to (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time is shortened.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit operation transition setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hit medium control pointer).

When the control pointers are "0", "2", and "4" in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). The off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.
Further, in step A1411, when the control pointers are "1", "3", and "5", the large winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit medium control pointer is sequentially set at the end of opening and the end of closing. Will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "0" and 1 At the end of the first 1500ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500ms closing to the second 200ms opening), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "1" and the second 200ms opening is opened. The small hit medium control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hit medium control is updated at the end of the third 200 msec opening. The pointer is updated to "4", and the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "6", and after the elapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec, it is closed for 2000 msec, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) in the above-mentioned small hit middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing number. Save to the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, "10" related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is used as the special figure game process. Save to the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting process is completed. ..

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the migration information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610). The effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), and the effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed, and then the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (in the time reduction state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.
If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step). A1621), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure is usually used. The process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 95 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the general map game process described later. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (normal symbols) and setting display data of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (step A2101). .. In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( The address of (stop) and the address of display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

When the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variable symbol number of the controlled object is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region of the controlled object is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) is defined. A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of), and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the normal figure (normal figure fluctuation display game). Has been done. The initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval for updating the lighting pattern during the fluctuation time in the batch display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 to (variable symbol number upper limit determination value -1). ) Will be updated sequentially. In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of the above, the display that goes around is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the upper limit determination value of the variable symbol number in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 7. Therefore, the special figure 1 changing display, which is repeatedly displayed during the changing display of the first special figure changing display game, completes the cycle by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the upper limit determination value of the variable symbol number in the variation control table of the second special figure (second special figure variation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 changing display that is repeatedly displayed during the changing display of the second special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the normal map (normal map fluctuation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or the time has already been up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game are being set, and the normal map is being changed. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric power remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). ) To end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during a special time reduction (during normal power support)). (Step B102).
In the right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105). If the player is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the number of reserved figures is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of pending figures is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted, saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, and the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the updated normal electric counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, it hits the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure, saves the operation end value (for example, "4") (step B205), clears the normal figure game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and performs the normal power winning switch monitoring process. finish. That is, if there is a prize for a regular train that exceeds the upper limit value during the hit state of the regular map, the hit state of the regular map ends in the middle at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the number of normal power counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B201; Y). ) Performs the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the normal drawing normal processing. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (for 1 hold number). Step B302), the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number), and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the user is in the high probability of the normal figure, that is, in the time saving state, which is higher than the probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) (step B304).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (Step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B309), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B310), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B311), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1".
Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250".
In addition, when the probability is high, the hit random number value is any of "1" to "250", and the hit random number value is "0".

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the random number storage area for the normal figure from 2 to 4 is moved from the random number storage area for the normal number 1 to 3 for the random number. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.
Then, the process transition setting process (step B320) during the fluctuation of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 100 shows the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321) in the above-mentioned normal figure normal process, and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) in the normal figure display process described later. .. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 101 shows the process transition setting process (step B320) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal map. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
After that, the normal map fluctuation time (for example, 500 msec. In the case of this embodiment, the normal map fluctuation time is common between the normal map low probability state and the normal map high probability state) is set in the normal map game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, turn on the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal figure fluctuation display game changes. The changing flag indicating that the game is inside is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (52 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B346), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. To finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing transition setting process (step B401) in the above-mentioned normal map changing process will be described. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), in the normal map display processing transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as the setting process for shifting to the normal map display processing (step B411), and the process is performed. The number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B412). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B413), and a signal regarding the end of the normal map fluctuation display is saved. (For example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Then (step B415), the process transition setting process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). , "2", or "4") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B506). After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
FIG. 104 shows the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B507) in the above-mentioned normal map display process. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, the test signal output data is a signal related to the hit of the solenoid fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the signal for hitting the normal symbol 1) and a signal for starting the solenoid operation (for example, turning on the signal for starting the solenoid operation 1). In order to save in the area (step B513) and output the signal for driving (on) the normal electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B516). Then, the flag (flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process transition setting process per normal figure is completed. To do.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during normal drawing.
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the normal operation shifts without performing the process of updating the normal processing control pointer area per normal figure by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed to end the process during normal drawing.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 106 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am doing it. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that after the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. The wait time of is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B612), and in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B613), and the normal power operation transition setting is made. End the process.

When the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B614), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B615). Ends the solenoid operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process number is "4" because the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B619), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B612, 200 msec is saved as the wait time, in step B614, 1700 msec is saved as the normal electric opening time, and in step B618, 600 msec is saved as the normal electric remaining ball processing time. ..
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 103, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the normal power opening time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal electric power opening time is "500 msec", the general electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 500 msec, and then the control pointer is set to "4". Therefore, a normal electric remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.
When the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 103, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the open time of the normal electric power. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 200 msec is 200 msec because the control pointer is "2". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set.
When the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 3", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 103, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the open time of the normal electric power. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 200 msec is 200 msec because the control pointer is "0". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "2", so it is 200 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining sphere processing time of the normal electric power is set.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the normal electric remaining ball processing, the normal figure per end processing transition setting process (step B701) is performed.

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end process transition setting process (step B701) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the normal figure hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the normal figure hit end process is set (step B711), and the process number is set to the normal figure game. Save in the process number area (step B712).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B716), and the end process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned futur-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the normal figure per end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation display game (for example, turning off the middle signal per normal symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display, the normal figure hold display, the first game state display unit, the second game state display unit, and the round display provided in the batch display device 50 Make settings related to driving the segment LEDs that make up the unit.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output is on timing depending on whether or not the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, so that a blinking cycle of 128 msec is created.
When the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 of the normal figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the normal figure hold indicator is defined is set. (Step S503), if the output is not on-timing (step S502; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table, and the data is saved in the segment area of the reserved number of normal figures display (step S505). In the present embodiment, as long as the number of reserved figures is any one of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which table of the number of reserved figures is set.

Next, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S506), and when the output is on-timing (step S506; Y), the number of special figure 1 holdes in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step S507). Step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S510), and if the output is on-timing (step S510; Y), the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when the output is not on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step). S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state is set (step S516) is set (step S516), and the game state display number is set. The display data corresponding to the above is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game status display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and turned on during special drawing time reduction (during normal power support).
After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that the right-handed hit is more advantageous than the left-handed hit is set (step S518), and the game is played. The display data corresponding to the status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game status display unit (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is completed. In the present embodiment, the second game status display unit composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hit, during small hit, during normal electric support). ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is concerned. Determines if the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step S604). For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the notification time of the magnet fraud is specified. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, and the fraud notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the magnet illegal notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet invalid flag does not match the value in the magnet invalid flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed.
Here, "step S601; N"->"stepS608"->"stepS609"->"stepS610;Y"->"stepS611"->"stepS612"->"stepS613;Y" is a normal route.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is detected a predetermined number of times, while in the case of panel radio wave fraud, the panel radio wave sensor 62 is detected once. At that point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" or -1. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the illegal radio wave notification is prepared (step S707), a radio wave illegal cancellation flag is prepared as a radio wave illegal flag (step S708), and the prepared radio wave illegal flag is set. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the board radio wave invalid flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the effect command is given. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move to the processing of. Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the process of step S810 is performed without the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), the panel radio fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and the frame radio fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), it is common. When an electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or a big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). Step S816), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N), and general electric wave fraud has not occurred. (Step S813; N), when the large winning opening fraud has not occurred (step S814; N), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S815), and step S818 is performed. Move to processing.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S819) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S820). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S822), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”, -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step S833).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is filled with the main prize ball. The initial value of the signal output control timer is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is one of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times (set).
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is one of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is completed.
When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0". When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S846; N). Step S848), the start port signal editing process is completed.

Next, the effect in the game and the control by the effect control device 300 that controls this effect will be described. FIGS. 116 and 117 show an example of the effect in the special gaming state. Here, the case where the 16R probability variation B jackpot including the short opening occurs is shown.

After the result mode of the big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game, the fanfare effect according to the big hit type is performed as shown in FIG. 116 (a), and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the display device 41, the number of rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the symbol display 41b displaying the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, and the right-handed instruction to instruct right-handed hitting Display 41c, display 41d of the number of acquired game balls indicating the number of prize balls acquired by long opening is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), when a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning device 38 in a long opening round and a prize ball is obtained, the number of the prize balls is displayed as the prize ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and the interval is reached, an interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 116 (d). Here, the next round will also be open for a long time, so an interval effect for long open will be performed.

Further, when the round game progresses to a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode shift becomes as shown in FIG. 116 (e). The selection screen 41f is displayed. On the mode transition selection screen 41f, it is possible to select a normal mode that forms the first mode and a delay mode that forms the second mode, and the player moves the cursor imitating a finger by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Make a selection.

Further, in the interval production of the round that may be short-open from the next time, that is, in the interval production after the end of 4R, 41 g of the round continuation production that notifies whether or not the long opening will continue after the next time is performed. .. In this round continuous effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the letters "short" and "long" blink alternately, and the final lit letter indicates the result. Here, the jackpot type is Since it is 16R probability change B, it is notified that it will be a short opening. Further, when it is notified that the short opening will be performed, a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at is performed as an interval effect as shown in FIG. 117 (b). For example, when the jackpot type is 16R probability variation A (all open long), it is notified that the character "long" is lit in the round continuous effect 41 g and the open is long.

As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in a round with a short opening. Further, an emphasis effect 41i is performed to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open. The emphasis effect 41i is displayed as if light is being emitted from the special variable winning device 38. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a decorative means for decorating by light emission, and the light emitting mode by the decorative means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i are associated with the light emitting timing, the light emitting intensity, the light emitting color, and the like. It may or may not be synchronized with.

Further, when the round in the short opening is started, the number of winning game balls displayed in the short opening is displayed separately from the winning game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the long opening. Is displayed. In addition, the number of rounds displayed 41a displays the number of remaining openings. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the running round, and each round is opened once, so it is displayed as 12 more rounds. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), when the round with the short opening ends and the interval time is reached, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the emphasis effect 41i emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open is Once finished, the emphasis effect 41i is restarted when the next round is started as shown in FIG. 117 (e).

Then, when the final round is completed, the ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 117 (f) and 117 (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (f), the number of acquired game balls displayed 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the long opening and the number of short opening acquired game balls 41j indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the short opening The effect of adding the values in the above is performed, and as shown in FIG. 117 (g), the total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special gaming state is performed.

Further, in the ending effect, the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The content of this state suggestion display differs depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 118, depending on the probability state after the end of the special game state (1) to The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), when the normal mode that forms the first mode is selected, only the character of (1) is selected in the high probability state, and (2) in the low probability state. ) Characters are selected. Further, when the dere mode that forms the second mode is selected as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. It has become. In addition to the character image, the probability state may be suggested by character information such as dialogue.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the above-mentioned effect, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 119 and the timer interrupt process (not shown). As shown in FIG. 119, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, the initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), the effect mode management process for managing the effect mode is performed (step C21), and the WDT is cleared (step C8). Return to.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 120 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 121 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, in steps C232 and C233, when it is determined that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or in step C234, it is determined that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the jackpot command is within the range (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model specification command. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 is produced. It is a production such as displaying. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 122 shows a single-shot command process in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step C261 that the MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determine (step C263). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, the scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is on hold in FIG. 1 (step C269). Then, when the MODE is in the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, in step C269, when it is determined that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), the MODE determines whether the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in FIG. 2 (step C271; Y), the MODE is subjected to the special figure 2 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the held hold on the display device 41. (Step C272), the single-shot command processing is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not on hold in FIG. 2 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when the MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). Then, when the MODE is an error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

Further, in step C275, when MODE is not an error / invalidity (step C275; N), MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching setting process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). Then, when MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether or not the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the symbol stop command is the target of the special figure that is currently changing.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 123 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C302), sets the look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Save in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C303), set the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and end the look-ahead symbol command processing. The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. If the read-ahead variation command is not waiting to be received (step C311; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing by the effect control device 300. First, the process of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of held numbers of the symbols of the latest hold information (step C313) is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-internal look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuations, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuations set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of judgment, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that have a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation. It is converted into a MODE classified according to the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, there are various modes even in the same type of reach, as the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACTs, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N), the command value is abnormal, so the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when both the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and the MODE is saved. A look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) (step C320; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C321) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the pre-reading notice effect (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading advance notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and is an effect or variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. It is an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading notice effect is set (step C324), and the pre-reading variable command processing is ended.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 125 shows a symbol-based command process (step C240) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this symbol-based command processing, first, the special symbol type (either special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352) and end the symbol command processing.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, a 16R normal A jackpot symbol, a 16R normal B jackpot symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. It is associated with the data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from multiple symbol type setting tables. Is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 126 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, a 16R normal A jackpot symbol, a 16R normal B jackpot symbol, and a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol. There is a winning pattern. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is as if the deviation command (variation pattern command) was received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol was received. It means that the combination is inconsistent with the above (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 127 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the production mode at that time is set (step C382). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always an out-of-line symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a low probability mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for notices appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired by referring to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the notice production of the latter half fluctuation. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

Next, an operation substitution process for setting another movable effect member to operate in place of the movable effect member that had a malfunction in the initial operation is performed (step C393). The details of the operation substitution process will be described later. Then, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C394), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C395). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C396). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, the sound number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C397), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of the identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C398). Further, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is set. (Step C399), and the variation effect setting process is completed.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 128 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, when the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during the fanfare. The setting (step C403) is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number of rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), the MODE determines if it is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminate system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is the ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state, screen information for notifying that the high probability state is reached is set, and the big hit ends. The ending effect setting process for setting the screen information corresponding to the later game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command process is completed. If the MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning the special variable winning device 38.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command process ends. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is completed.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 129 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the openable round is a short open round in which the openable time is a predetermined time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the short opening round has an opening time of 0.2 seconds, and the long opening round has an opening time of 29 seconds.

Then, if it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball number counter is set. The display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on this is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is completed. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. , The updated value is displayed in step C423.

Further, in the case of the short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the short opening pattern counter is updated. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process is completed. The short-open pattern counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short-open round, and in step C424, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. , The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are counted and displayed separately. That is, the effect control device 300 provides a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is a winning in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant. Further, the effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means. It serves as a counting means for separately counting the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the above.

[Fanfare production setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, the ACT determines whether the fanfare is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, and 16R normal B.

When the ACT is a jackpot fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of jackpots is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display content of the jackpot fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of jackpots (step C433). The number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on the normal game state, which is not a high probability state or a time saving state. That is, it counts the so-called number of consecutive chans. After that, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is set (step C434), and it is determined whether the jackpot includes a short opening (step C435). When the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all the rounds are long opening, the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. When the short opening is included (step C434; Y), the short opening big hit information is set (step C436), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. ..

If the ACT is not a jackpot fanfare (step C431; N), the ACT determines if it is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the 4R probability variation (sudden probability). When the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT is a hit from a continuous effect, which is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the suddenly dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C439), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is performed. End the setting process. In the sudden probability-only effect corresponding to the probability state, when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, the probability state becomes high after the special game state, so an effect for notifying or suggesting to that effect is performed. Further, when the 4R probability change occurs in the high probability state, the high probability state continues even after the special game state, so an effect of notifying or suggesting to that effect is performed.

Further, in the case of a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; Y), the sudden effect to be executed is drawn from the sudden effect patterns related to the current variable effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the sudden effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. That is, in the case of the 4R probability change from the continuous production, the production related to the continuous production is performed even in the special game state. In the case of 4R probability change, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), the ACT determines whether it is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. Further, when the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the ACT is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C443). ).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare The effect setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, the probability state does not change before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state, an effect of notifying or suggesting that the probability state at the time of the small hit is maintained is performed.

Further, in the case of a hit from the continuous effect (step C442; Y), the small hit effect to be executed is drawn from the small hit effect patterns related to the current variable effect (continuous effect) (step C445). The display setting of the determined small hit effect is performed (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous production, the production related to the continuous production is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability variation or small hit from continuous production, when 4R probability variation or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure variation display game that becomes sudden probability or small hit), the result mode is not clearly shown, and 4R An effect is performed to indicate which one is in the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit. For example, the production in which the enemy character and the ally character fight is performed as a continuous production, and the battle is not yet settled when the result mode is derived. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability change, an effect in which the ally character wins (sudden probability effect) is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect in which the enemy character wins (small hit effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, the display setting of the right-handed instruction is set (step C461), and it is determined whether the game is in a special gaming state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability change) (step C462).

In the case of a special gaming state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (step C462; Y), the display setting of the small hit / sudden round effect is set (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. Further, when the game is not in a special gaming state based on a small hit or abruptness (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of a big hit including a short open round It is determined whether or not there is (step C464).

When there is no short-open jackpot information (step C464; N), that is, in the special gaming state of only long-open rounds, the number of rounds is set to be displayed (step C465), and the display setting of the round effect of the long-open pattern is set. (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long opening pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether the mode transition selection round is such that the notification mode at the end of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state can be selected (step C468). If it is not a mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends. Further, in the case of the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), the display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is short-open jackpot information (step C464; Y), that is, in a special gaming state including a short-open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value for the short-open round (step C470). ). Then, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value for a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

Further, when the number of rounds is a predetermined value for a short open round (step C470; Y), that is, when the round is a short open round, the display setting of the round effect of the short open pattern is set (step C471), and the round is performed. The number of remaining open times is calculated from the number upper limit value information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening, which is the number of times of opening in the short opening, is set (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect for encouraging the aim of winning the special variable winning device 38 is set (step C475). After that, the sound number which is the BGM number based on the emphasis effect, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decorative lamp, etc. are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process is completed.

That is, in the round with a short opening, the small hit with a short opening, and the round with a 4R probability variation, a different effect from the round with a long opening is performed. As described above, the special variable winning device 38 makes it easy for the game ball to stay in the opening / closing member 990, and it is possible to aim for a prize even with a short opening, so emphasis is placed on encouraging the player to aim for a prize. The production 41i is performed.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number which is a BGM number of a long opening interval, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decorative lamp, etc. are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round is set. It is determined whether or not there is short-open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

If there is no short-open jackpot information (step C482; N), that is, if there is only a long-open round, the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the long opening interval as shown in FIG. 116 (d) is set. Further, when there is short-open jackpot information (step C482; Y), that is, when there is a special gaming state including short-open rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of final rounds that will be open for a long time, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

When the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, when the round is a short opening from the next time, the display setting of the round continuous notification effect is set (step C484), and the BGM based on the round continuous notification effect is set. The sound number, which is the number of the above, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc., is set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is completed. As a result, the round continuous notification effect as shown in FIGS. 117A and 117B is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). When the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the next round will be a long opening, and the long opening interval will remain set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is set (step C487), and the sound number, the decorative lamp, etc., which are the BGM numbers of the short opening interval, are used. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process is completed. In this case, the short opening interval as shown in FIG. 117 (d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasis effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or the interval-only emphasis effect may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information, which is the jackpot type information that triggered the occurrence of this special game state, is loaded (step C491), and the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (step C491) are loaded. (See FIG. 118 (a)), the state suggestion display is set (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode as the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the player can select it. The first mode and the second mode are different production modes such as the content of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state, and the production of the special figure variation display game. The effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player selects by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. Further, when there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, when the second mode is set, a state suggestion display based on the selectivity in the second mode (see FIG. 118 (b)) is set (see FIG. 118 (b)). Step C494) and step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter (step C495), and the display setting of the addition effect based on the total acquired game ball number is set (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is completed. By the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. ..

FIG. 134 shows a modified example of the effect in the special gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 134A to 134C, the right-handed instruction display 41c for instructing right-handedness may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game. Further, the right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b, but the back side of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right-handed instruction display 41c flows, and the symbol display 41b is always visible. State. It should be noted that the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, and the like, which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c, or may not be hidden.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) to 134 (f), the promotion effect 41h for urging the special variable winning device 38 to be aimed may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variable winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game, the promotion effect 41h is displayed on the back side of the symbol display 41b as shown in FIG. 134 (d). However, the symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or should not be hidden. Is also good. Further, the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) to (f) are simultaneously performed. You may.

FIG. 135 also shows a modified example of the effect in the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device 24 and the special variable winning device 38 are used as a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at and an emphasis effect 41i for emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open. Using the image of the device 38, the operation unit 24 may be instructed to turn largely to the right, or the special variable winning device 38 may be instructed to aim. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be aimed at. Further, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located at the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized at first glance. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at is known. Of course, the light emitting mode of the operation unit 24 may be synchronized in the same manner.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special variable winning device 38. Further, in the image of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, it is not necessary to display in synchronization with the light emission effect of the actual operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38. good. Further, the image of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

Further, the character information and the image of the arrow included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the batch display device 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be synchronized with the actual display mode of the batch display device 50, or the display may not be synchronized. Is also good. Any display mode may be used when the display mode is not synchronized, but for example, it is associated with a state in which all lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7-segment, "7" or the like). A specific number is lit. In the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a jackpot is associated as a unique lighting mode when a jackpot occurs).

Further, when the right-handed gaming state is started, an image may be displayed in which the operation unit 24 is instructed to be largely turned to the right or the normal variable winning device 37 is instructed to aim. .. Further, when the left-handed gaming state is started, an image may be displayed in which the operation unit 24 is instructed to turn slightly to the right or the winning device 90 is instructed to aim.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the remaining time display 41n that displays the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. In most cases, the end condition of the round that is established in the case of short opening is that the openable time elapses rather than the predetermined number of game balls being awarded to the special variable winning device 38, and the round ends in a certain time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are short-opened, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the round time until the end of the final round and the interval time. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from the case of notifying by the number of remaining rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. That is, the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state is provided, and the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means can be notified. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or more, and the second opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or less. Although described as a short opening, the present invention is not limited to this, and any opening mode may be used as long as the first opening mode and the second opening mode are different. Further, as the game machine, a game machine that executes a variable display game based on a prize in the starting area is mentioned, but other game machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in an auxiliary game device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called blade that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the flow of the game ball winning in the auxiliary game device into a specific area. (Old 2 types) game machines may be used.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). A game in which a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball to 97) is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine 10 controls a special variable winning device 38 that can convert a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state, and an effect related to the game. An effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special game state includes a first open mode (long open) and a second open mode different from the first open mode. There is a mode (short opening), and when the second opening mode is executed, the effect control means can execute the promotion effect 41h for prompting the launch of the game ball toward the special variable winning device 38. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a launch operation unit (operation unit 24) for the player to operate to adjust the launch force of the game ball, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated by light emission. The effect control means is provided with a decorative means, and the effect control means displays the operation method of the launch operation unit necessary to make the launch force for launching the game ball toward the special variable winning device 38 as the promotion effect 41h. The display device 41 is used to display the decoration mode of the special variable winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the content of the promotion effect 41h.

Further, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In the game machine 10 that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. , A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. The operation mode of the 38 includes a first open mode (long open mode) and a second open mode (short open mode) different from the first open mode, and the special variable winning device 38 is awarded the first prize. It is provided with a winning determination means (effect control device 300) for determining which of the opening mode and the second opening mode the winning is. Therefore, it is possible to control the production and progress of the game based on the information obtained by the winning determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the prize in the special variable prize device 38, and based on the prize determination by the prize determination means, based on the prize in the special variable prize device 38 in the first opening mode. A counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the second open mode is provided. Therefore, it is possible to control the production and progress of the game based on the information obtained by the counting means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means is a prize ball based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode based on the counting result by the counting means. It is possible to separately notify the number and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the counting result which has not been notified yet at a predetermined timing after notifying only a part of the counting result by the counting means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power-on of the game machine will be described. The initial operation is for confirming the operation of the board effect device 44 forming the movable effect device, and the content of the initial operation is set according to the state of the detection sensor before the start of the initial operation. ..

[Initial operation processing]
FIG. 136 shows an initial operation process (step C20) in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 119). In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C101). The initial operation flag is set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. That is, it is a flag set based on the power-on.

If there is no initial operation flag (step C101; N), the process proceeds to step C108. If there is an initial operation flag (step C101; Y), the initial operation flag is cleared (step C102) and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C103). Then, it is determined whether all the states of the detection sensors are the normal detection states (step C104). The normal detection state is the detection state of the detection sensor when the movable effect device is in the initial position, and the all normal detection state is the state in which all the movable effect devices are in the initial position when the power is turned on. There is no abnormality in the state of the movable effect device.

When all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104; Y), the initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation is set (step C105), and the initial operation executing flag is set (step C107). If all the detection sensor states are not in the normal detection state (step C104; N), an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation according to the detection state is set (step C106), and an initial operation executing flag is set. (Step C107). The initial operation table is a table in which the execution contents of the initial operation are defined, and the initial operation is executed according to the contents of this table.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C108), and if there is no initial operation executing flag (step C108; N), the initial operation processing ends. Further, when there is an initial operation executing flag (step C108; Y), that is, when the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is found in the executing initial operation (step C109). When no abnormality is found in the initial operation during execution (step C109; N), it is determined whether all the initial operations have been completed (step C113). If an abnormality is found in the initial operation during execution (step C109; Y), a malfunction error flag corresponding to the movable effect device in which the abnormality is found is set (step C110), and the movable effect device is set. It is determined whether there is an alternative initial operation which is an initial operation performed instead of the initial operation (step C111).

If there is no alternative initial operation (step C111), the process proceeds to step C113. If there is an alternative initial operation (step C111), the alternative initial operation is set (step C112), and the process proceeds to step C113. Then, when all the initial operations are not completed (step C113; N), the initial operation process ends. When all the initial operations are completed (step C113; Y), the initial operation executing flag is cleared (step C114), and the initial operation process ends.

As described above, detection sensors for detecting the operating state are provided corresponding to each movable effect device, and the detection state (normal detection state) in the state where each is in the initial position is in the state shown in FIG. 137. is there. If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state shown in FIG. 137 before the start of the initial operation, an initial operation table is set in which only the normal initial operation shown in FIG. 145 (a) is performed, and the initial operation is performed according to this initial operation table. It will be done.

In this initial operation, the normal initial operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position after operating from the initial position to the operation completion position is performed for each initial operation group shown in FIG. 137. A priority is set for each initial operation group, and the initial operation is performed from the group A having the highest priority, and when the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the group B having the next priority is performed. Similarly, after the initial operation of group B is completed, the initial operation of group C is performed. Then, when the initial operation of the group C is completed, the initial operation ends.

Specifically, first, as the initial operation of the group A, the initial operation of the central movable accessory unit 880 is performed. In this initial operation, each central movable member is moved from the initial position (see FIG. 13) to the operation completion position (see FIG. 14), and then is in the initial position (see FIG. 13). Refer to). After the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800 is performed as the initial operation of the group B. In this initial operation, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are moved from the initial positions (see FIG. 9) to the operation completion position by lowering the movable member unit 820. In addition to the state (see FIG. 10), the first upper movable member 848 is operated (see FIG. 11). After that, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

After the initial operation of the group B is completed, as the initial operation of the group C, the initial operation of the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 is performed. In this initial operation, the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is changed to the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is operated to the operation completion position (see FIG. 7B). After that, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is performed. Further, from the state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are in the initial positions (see FIG. 6A) to the state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated to the operation completion position (see FIG. 6B). After that, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 6A) is performed. When the initial operation of this group C is completed, the normal initial operation is completed.

The operation of the movable effect device included in the group B includes a vertical operation of the movable member unit 820, a rotational operation of the first upper movable member 848, and a swinging operation of the second upper movable member 860, all of which are games. However, in the normal initial operation of the group B, the swinging operation of the second upper movable member 860 is not performed, although it is an operation that may be executed in. The rotation operation of the first upper movable member 848 is an operation indicating that the player has higher expectations than the swing operation of the second upper movable member 860, and is an operation with a low execution frequency. Normally, in the initial operation, it is confirmed whether the operation to be executed in the scene where the player's expectation is highest is feasible, so that the interest of the game is not impaired in the scene.

Further, the above-mentioned normal initial operation is performed in order from the group including the operation having a large area overlapping with the display device 41. That is, the area where the initial operation of the group A shown in FIG. 138 (a) overlaps the display device 41 most is large, and then the area where the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138 (b) overlaps the display device 41 is large. The area where the initial operation of the group C shown in (c) and (d) overlaps with the display device 41 is the smallest.

Further, in the initial operation of the group C, of the initial operation of the first lower movable member 740, 741 shown in FIG. 138 (d) and the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 shown in FIG. 138 (c), the display device. The initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, which has a large area overlapping with 41, is performed first. By performing the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large in this way, when the display of the display device 41 is started after a certain period of time has passed from the power-on, the display contents cannot be seen by the movable effect device. Can be prevented.

Performing the initial operations in this order is particularly effective when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 139 (a) shows an example of a case where a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation display game. In this example, first, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are executed, and the display device displays the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139 (b). Since the variable display is being performed here, the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the second decorative game display unit 88 are in a variable display state. Further, as a game effect, the board effect device 44 forming the movable effect device can be operated, and the movable effect device can be operated according to the content of the effect.

If a power failure occurs while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t11), the game control device 100 interrupts the running special figure fluctuation display game and performs backup processing to change the state at the time of the power failure. Processing for holding is performed. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the decorative special figure variation display game being executed is lost. Further, the display device 41 is not displayed during a power failure. Further, the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be performed.

After that, when the power is restored from the power failure (t12), the game control device 100 performs a process for restarting the game from the state at the time of the power failure based on the backed up information. Then, when the power failure is normally restored based on the backed up data, the power failure recovery command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the interrupted special figure variation display game is restarted (t13).

The effect control device 300 displays the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 (c) on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored (t12). In addition, the initial operation of the movable production device is started when the power failure is restored. Then, since it can be grasped that the power failure has been restored based on the reception of the power failure recovery command, a power failure recovery screen indicating that fact is displayed in FIG. 139 (d) (t13).

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends, the game control device 100 transmits a symbol stop command to the effect control device 300. Since the information of the decorative special figure variation display game is lost in the effect control device 300 due to the occurrence of a power failure, the decorative special figure variation display game cannot be restarted. Therefore, the display device 41 recovers from the power failure even during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The screen display continues. Then, since the end of the special figure variation display game can be grasped upon receiving this symbol stop command, the display of the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139 (b) is started and the result is displayed (t14). As a result, the display returns to the state in which the game is normally performed. When the stop time for displaying the result elapses, a new special figure variation display game is started (t15).

If the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the restarted special figure fluctuation display game is small, the initial operation may end (t20) after the result display timing (t14) as in this example, and during the display of the result. A movable effect device may be present in front of the display device 41. However, by performing the initial operation in order from the operation having the largest area overlapping with the display device 41, the area where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device becomes as small as possible when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. It can be done so as not to interfere with the visibility of the result. As for the importance of the information displayed at the time of power failure recovery, the information displayed on the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 (c) is the least important, followed by the information on the power failure recovery screen shown in FIG. 139 (d). Is the most important, and the information of the result on the in-game screen shown in FIG. 139 (b) is the most important. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of more important information by performing the initial operation in order from the operation having the largest area overlapping with the display device 41.

Further, from the viewpoint of improving the visibility of the result of the restarted special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display which is the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game located substantially in the center of the display area of the display device 41. The initial operation may be performed in order from the operation having the largest area overlapping with the game display unit 85. Here, since the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138 (b) has the largest area overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, the priority of the initial operation is set to the highest. Hereinafter, since the area overlapping the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 becomes smaller in the order of group C shown in FIGS. 138 (c) and 138 (d) and group A shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial operation is performed in this order. Set so that the priority of is low. As a result, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device can be reduced as much as possible, and the visual recognition of the result can be prevented.

From the above, in a game machine that executes a game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, a predetermined effect is produced. Movable effect devices (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, A second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), a display device 41 capable of displaying an image related to a game, and an effect control means for controlling the movable effect device and the display device. (Effect control device 300), and the effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power is turned on, and the movable effect device displays among a plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation. This means that the operations are performed in order from the operation in which the ratio of hiding the device 41 is large. Therefore, it is possible not to interfere with the visibility of the information displayed when the power is turned on.

In addition, a game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition is executed, and a predetermined effect operation is performed in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A movable effect device, a display device 41 capable of displaying a decorative game corresponding to the game in a predetermined area, and an effect control means for controlling the movable effect device and the display device 41 are provided, and the effect control means is based on power-on. It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device, and among the plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation, the movable effect device performs the operation in order from the operation in which the ratio of hiding the predetermined area in the display device is large. .. Therefore, it is possible not to interfere with the visibility of the information displayed in the predetermined area when the power is turned on.

Regarding the effect operation of the movable effect device, since the effect operation cannot be performed in the state where the initial operation is performed (t12 to t20), the effect operation cannot be performed during this period. Further, since the effect control device 300 loses the effect information set at the start of the special figure variation display game due to the occurrence of a power failure, at least a command related to the game including information that enables the current progress of the game to be grasped is issued. Until it is received, the effect operation of the movable effect device corresponding to the special figure variation display game cannot be performed.

In this example, after the power failure is restored, the symbol stop command is received as a command related to the game (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, the effect operation of the movable effect device is left in a state where the effect operation cannot be performed at this point. Then, the initial operation ends after receiving the symbol stop command (t20), and after that, a variable command is received as a command related to the game, and from this point onward, the effect operation of the movable effect device becomes possible (t15).

That is, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is restarted by restoration, receiving a command related to the game after the end of the initial operation enables the effect operation. It becomes a condition. In addition, since the start memory exists here, the variable command of the next game is received, but if there is no start memory, the customer wait command is received as a command related to the game after the end of the initial operation, and this customer wait From the time when the command is received, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled.

[Production operation permission processing]
FIG. 140 shows the effect operation permission process performed in the movable body control process (step C19) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in the effect control device 300. In this effect operation permission process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect operation disable flag indicating that the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be performed is set (step C511). This effect non-operation flag is set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. .. That is, it is a flag set based on the power-on.

If there is no effect operation disabled flag (step C511; N), that is, if the effect operation is possible, the effect operation permission process ends. Further, when there is an effect operation disabled flag (step C511; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C512). This initial operation flag is a flag instructing that the initial operation should be performed, and is a process of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine (step). It is set in C7). That is, it is a flag set based on the power-on.

When there is this initial operation flag (step C512; Y), the effect operation permission process ends. In this case, since the initial operation is to be performed from now on, the state in which the effect operation cannot be performed is maintained. If there is no initial operation flag (step C512; N), it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C513). This initial operation executing flag is a flag set during the execution of the initial operation, is set based on the initial operation being set based on the initial operation flag in the initial operation process (see FIG. 136), and ends the initial operation. It is cleared by.

If there is this initial operation executing flag (step C513; Y), the effect operation permission process ends. In this case, since the initial operation is being executed, the state in which the effect operation cannot be performed is maintained. If there is no initial operation executing flag (step C513; N), it is determined whether or not a command related to the game including information that makes it possible to grasp the progress of the current game has been received (step C514). That is, when there is no effect operation disabled flag and there is no initial operation flag and initial operation executing flag, it is determined whether or not a command related to the game has been received.

If no command related to the game has been received (step C514; N), the effect operation permission process ends. When a command related to the game is received (step C514; Y), the effect operation disabling flag is cleared (step C515), and the effect operation permission process ends. As a result, the effect operation of the movable effect device becomes possible.

In FIG. 141, in the example shown in FIG. 139, the end of the initial operation (t20) is earlier than the reception (t14) of the symbol stop command, which is a command including information that enables the progress of the current game to be grasped. The case is shown. In this case, the movable effect device is left in a state where the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be performed (t20 to t14) until the symbol stop command is received after the initial operation is completed, and the movable effect device is left from the time when the symbol stop command is received (t14). The production operation of is possible.

FIG. 142A shows a case where the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by the power failure is a big hit in the example shown in FIG. 141. In this case as well, the movable effect device is left in a state where the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be performed until the symbol stop command is received after the initial operation is completed (t20 to t14), and the movable effect device is left from the time when the symbol stop command is received (t14). The production operation of is possible.

FIG. 142 (b) shows the case where the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by the power failure is a big hit in the example shown in FIG. 139 (a). In this case, the symbol stop command is received as a command related to the game after the power failure is restored (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, the effect operation of the movable effect device is left in a state where it cannot be produced at this point. .. Then, the initial operation ends after receiving the symbol stop command (t20), and after that, the fanfare command is received as a command related to the game, and the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from this point (t30). That is, it is possible to perform the effect operation of the movable effect device from the start of the special game state. It should be noted that also in FIG. 142 (a), the effect operation of the movable effect device may be enabled from the reception of the fanfare command, that is, the start of the special game state, not from the reception of the symbol stop command.

FIG. 143 shows a case where the symbol stop command is not received. The case where the symbol stop command is not received means that the symbol stop command is not transmitted as a specification of the game machine, the symbol stop command cannot be transmitted due to some abnormality, or the transmitted symbol stop command is missed. included.

FIG. 143 (a) shows the case where the symbol stop command is not received in FIG. 142 (a), and the initial operation is completed before the variation display is terminated and the result is displayed in the special figure variation display game. Is. Further, FIG. 143 (b) is a case where the symbol stop command is not received in FIG. 142 (b), and the initial operation is completed in a state where the variation display is completed and the result is displayed in the special figure variation display game. If this is the case. In either case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the time (t30) when the fanfare command, which is a command related to the game, is received after the end of the initial operation, that is, from the start of the special game state.

In addition to the symbol stop command and fanfare command, the commands related to the game, which is one of the conditions that enable the effect operation of the movable effect device, include variable commands, customer waiting commands, round commands, interval commands, ending commands, and so on. A small hit fanfare command can be mentioned. Based on the reception of these commands, the effect control device 300 can grasp the current progress of the game, and can set an appropriate effect operation. Even if it is another command, if it is a command that includes information that makes it possible to grasp the progress of the current game, it can be a command related to the game, which is one of the conditions that enable the effect operation of the movable effect device. It is possible.

Further, the command related to the game, which is one of the conditions that enable the effect operation of the movable effect device, is a command that is set together with the update of the process number in one timer interrupt in the special figure game process shown in FIG. It can be said that. For example, in the symbol stop command, the symbol stop command is set (steps A601 and A602) and the special symbol game processing number is updated (steps A605 and A606) by one timer interrupt in the special symbol changing process shown in FIG. It is something that has come to be called.

In addition, the power failure recovery command and initialization command that indicate the power-on of the game machine do not include information that enables the current progress of the game to be grasped, so that one of the conditions that enables the effect operation of the movable effect device. Although it is not included in the commands related to the game, these commands are related to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the effect operation of the movable effect device by including information that enables the progress of the current game to be grasped. It may be used as a command. Further, even if the effect control device 300 does not include information that enables the current progress of the game to be grasped, the effect control device 300 shall set an arbitrary effect operation (an operation that is not linked to the progress of the game) based on this command. The command may be used as a command related to a game, which is one of the conditions that enable the effect operation of the movable effect device.

From the above, based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special advantage is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that generates a game state, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game based on information from the game control means. A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit) capable of executing an effect operation controlled by the effect control means to operate the movable effect member according to the progress of the game. 820, 1st upper movable member 848, 2nd upper movable member 860, 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930) The game control means can retain information even in a power failure state, and the game can be restarted based on the information held when the power failure is restored. The effect control means is a movable effect device based on the recovery of the power failure. The game control means interrupts the game when a power failure occurs during the execution of the game, restarts the game when the power failure is restored, and the effect control means is special. If the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the resulting game, and the initial operation of the movable production device started with the restoration of the power failure is completed by the end of the restarted game. , It means that the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to perform the production operation of the movable production device as soon as possible after the power failure is restored, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent inadvertent movements in the restarted game, prevent inconsistencies in the production, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, in the special game state, the operation can be performed as usual, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, which is a special result, the effect control means completes the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the restoration of the power failure by the time the result is displayed. In that case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the display of the result. Therefore, when the initial operation is completed early, the production operation can be started early, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 144 shows an execution mode of an operation-responsive effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 by the player in the example shown in FIG. 142 (b). The operation response effect during the execution of the special figure variation display game is determined so that the execution timing and the effect content are determined at the start of the special figure variation display game, and are executed according to the progress of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In the state before the power failure occurs, the operation response effect is executed at the scheduled timing (t41 to t42). At this time, the display device 41 displays an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29.

When a power failure occurs (t11), the effect control device 300 loses the effect information set at the start of the special figure variation display game. For this reason, the operation-corresponding effect cannot be executed at least until a command related to the game including information that makes it possible to grasp the progress of the current game is received, and the scheduled timings (t43 to t44, t45 to t46, t47) The operation-corresponding effect in ~ t48) is not executed.

After that, when the symbol stop command is received as a command related to the game (t14), the progress status of the current game can be grasped, and the operation corresponding effect can be executed. In this case, the operation-corresponding effect is not determined at the start of the special figure variation display game, but the execution timing and effect content are determined based on the received command related to the game, or the special figure variation display to be executed. The execution timing and the content of the production are determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the game.

Here, the operation-corresponding effect is executed at the timing when the result is derived in the special figure variation display game (t14 to t49). During the period in which the operation-corresponding effect is executed, the operation promotion image is not displayed because the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed. That is, when the effect control device 300 executes the operation-corresponding effect when there is an initial operation flag which is a flag indicating that the initial operation should be performed and an initial operation executing flag set during the execution of the initial operation. The operation promotion image is not displayed. If the initial operation of the movable effect device is completed, the operation promotion image is displayed. That is, the execution mode of the operation-corresponding effect is different depending on whether or not the initial operation is being executed. Further, in the operation corresponding effect (t50 to t51) performed after the end of the initial operation, the operation promotion image is displayed in the same manner as before the power failure occurs.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 by the player corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is different depending on the presence or absence of the initial operation, but the progress of the special figure variation display game. The operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 by the player, which can be executed regardless of the above, may be executed differently depending on the presence or absence of the initial operation.

For example, regarding the adjustment of volume and brightness, if the initial operation is not being executed, the display of the volume and brightness values is displayed on the display device 41 according to the operation, and if the initial operation is not being executed, the display is made according to the operation. The volume and brightness may be changed, but the values may not be displayed. For things that are not related to the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, such as adjusting the volume and brightness, it may be possible to adjust from the timing when the power failure is restored (t12), or from the timing when the initial screen display ends (t13). It may be adjustable. Further, it may be possible to adjust from the timing (t14) when the command related to the game is received, as in the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game.

Further, when the initial operation is performed, the operation-corresponding effect may not be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the operation correspondence effect is not executed from the occurrence of the power failure (t11) to the end of the initial operation (t20). Further, the operation-corresponding effect may not be executed until the initial operation is completed and the command related to the game is received, as in the case of whether or not the effect operation of the movable effect device is possible. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the operation corresponding effect is not executed from the occurrence of the power failure (t11) until the initial operation is completed (t20) and the fanfare command is received (t30). In FIG. 144, since the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, the command related to the game after the initial operation is completed is the fanfare command. If there is a memory, the variable command of the next game corresponds, and if there is no start memory, the customer waiting command corresponds.

Further, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 may be made operable by the control of the effect control device 300. For example, the state shown in FIG. 1 may be set as the initial position, and the operation may be performed at a protruding position protruding upward from this initial position. When the power is restored from the power failure, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 are moved from the initial position to the protruding position and then returned to the initial position as an initial operation. Then, even if the operation-corresponding effect is executed during the initial operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the pressing operation may be accepted.

From the above, the production control that controls the production of the game in the game machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A means (effect control device 300), a display device 41 controlled by the effect control means and capable of displaying information about the game, and an effect operation controlled by the effect control means to operate the movable effect member according to the progress of the game. Executable movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, A second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and an operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) including an operation unit that receives an operation from a player. The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined operation-corresponding effect in response to the operation of the operation means, and is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the recovery from the power failure, and the initial operation is being executed. It means that the execution mode of the operation-corresponding effect is different depending on whether or not there is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies and inconveniences in the production due to the operation-responsive effect being performed at the same time as the initial operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation due to being confused with the initial operation. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the.

Further, the effect control means can execute the operation-corresponding effect at a predetermined timing in the game, can display an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the operation means at the predetermined timing, and when the initial operation is being executed, , It means that the operation promotion image is not displayed even at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies and inconveniences in the effect due to the operation-compatible effect being performed at the same time as the initial operation.

In addition, the effect control means does not execute the operation-corresponding effect when the initial operation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies and inconveniences in the effect due to the operation-compatible effect being performed at the same time as the initial operation.

In addition, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. The generated game machine includes an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game and an operation unit including an operation unit for receiving an operation from the player, and the operation means can operate the operation unit by controlling the effect control means. The effect control means performs the initial operation of the operation unit based on the recovery from the power failure, and can accept the operation of the operation unit even during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to execute the operation-corresponding effect even during the initial operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, if there is a detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, that is, if there is a movable effect device that is not in the initial position, an initial operation table that performs a special initial operation according to the detection state is set. The initial operation is performed. In this initial operation table, first, a special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state. In the special initial operation, a return operation is performed to return the movable effect device that is not in the initial position to the initial position. Then, the movable effect device that has performed this special initial operation usually does not perform the initial operation. That is, for the movable effect device that has performed the return operation, the initial operation is omitted because it can be confirmed that the device operates by the return operation. At this point, a part of the normal initial operation is omitted to reduce the time required for the initial operation. Can be shortened. That is, when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is performed instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation.

After performing this special initial operation, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group that does not include the movable effect device whose state of the detection sensor is not the normal detection state. In addition, for the initial operation group that includes the movable effect device whose detection sensor status is not the normal detection state and that has the movable effect device that was not the target of the special initial operation, the special initial operation group Performs initial operations other than the movable effect device that performed the operation. Note that the initial operation group in which the special initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices to which the device belongs is not subjected to the initial operation other than this special initial operation.

FIGS. 145 (b) to 146 (d) and FIG. 146 show an example of an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation. FIG. 145 (b) shows an initial operation table when the seventh detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not in the initial positions. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial positions is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed on the group B, which has the next priority after the group A, which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that have performed the special initial operation.

After that, the initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority. Then, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, which are movable effect devices that return to the group A having the highest priority and perform the initial operation but do not perform the special initial operation in the group A. Only perform the initial operation. This initial operation is an operation of operating from the initial position to the operation completion position and returning to the initial position as in the normal initial operation. That is, in this case, with respect to the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is set as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 145 (c) shows an initial operation table when the second detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed. Next, since group C, which is an initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the normal initial operation.

Next, the normal initial operation of the group B is performed, and the initial operation is performed only for the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are the movable effect devices that have not performed the special initial operation in the group C. This initial operation is an operation of operating from the initial position to the operation completion position and returning to the initial position as in the normal initial operation. That is, in this case, for the second lower movable member 770, the initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation.

Since the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730, which is Group C, are configured to be driveable by one drive source, one of the movable effect devices When the special initial operation is performed, it can be considered that the other movable effect device can also be operated. Therefore, the other initial operation may not be performed again. That is, in the example of FIG. 145 (c), the initial operation of the first lower movable member 740, 741 which is the fourth execution order may be omitted.

FIG. 145 (d) shows an initial operation table when the fifth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the first upper movable member 848 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the first upper movable member 848 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the next priority after the group B that has performed the special initial operation.

After that, it returns to the group A having the highest priority and normally performs the initial operation. Then, in Group B, the movable member unit 820, which is a movable effect device that has not performed the special initial operation, is initially operated. This initial operation is an operation of operating from the initial position to the operation completion position and returning to the initial position as in the normal initial operation. That is, in this case, for the first upper movable member 848, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is set as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

When the eighth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second upper movable member 860 is not in the initial position, the return operation for returning the second upper movable member 860 to the initial position may be performed. .. In this case, since the second upper movable member 860 does not normally perform the initial operation, the group B is usually performed in the initial operation. Of course, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the eighth detection sensor is in the normal detection state. This is because the second upper movable member 860 only swings left and right, and therefore does not affect the game even if it is not in the initial position.

When the special initial operation is performed as described above, the normal initial operation for the initial operation group that has the next priority after the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation is sequentially performed. ing. Further, after performing the initial operation for the group C having the lowest priority, the group returns to the group A having the highest priority, and the initial operation is performed according to the priority until the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices.

Further, when a plurality of movable effect devices are not in the initial positions, a return operation is performed to return each of them to the initial position one by one. In this case, the return operation is performed one by one in descending order of the return priority in the special initial operation shown in FIG. 137. The return priority is set in order from the one closest to the display device 41, and the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920, the closest to the display device 41 are set. 4 The rank of the central movable effect member 930 is high, and the rank of the farthest first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 is lower.

FIG. 146 (a) shows a case where the sixth detection sensor and the seventh detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920. And the initial operation table when the fourth central movable effect member 930 is not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, a special initial operation (return operation) for returning the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 having a higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return is performed. A special initial operation (return operation) is performed to return the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which have lower priorities, to the initial positions.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group B which is the next priority of the group A which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 which have finally performed the special initial operation. .. After that, the normal initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority. In this case, since the special initial operation is performed for the group A, all the movable effect devices belonging to the group A are initially operated, so that the normal initial operation for the group A is not performed. That is, in this case, for group A, the initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 146 (b) shows a case where the seventh detection sensor and the second detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770. The initial operation table when it is not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a special initial operation for returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which have higher return priorities, to the initial positions is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return is performed. A special initial operation is performed to return the second lower movable member 770, which has a lower priority, to the initial position.

Then, since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has finally performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the initial operation. As for group A, since the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are not performing the initial operation are performed. Only perform the initial operation of.

Next, the normal initial operation of group B is performed, and the initial operation of group C is performed. As for group C, since the return operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed, only the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which has not performed the initial operation is performed. That is, in this case, for the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770, the initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation. It is said.

FIG. 146 (c) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are not in the normal detection state, that is, when the movable member unit 820 is not in the initial position. Of the movable member units 820, the movable member unit (left), which is the drive mechanism 806 that operates on the left side, and the movable member unit (right), which is the drive mechanism 806 that operates on the right side, are basically operated at the same time. There is a need. Therefore, when both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 that detect these operating states are not in the normal detection state, the movable member unit (left) and the movable member unit (right) are first performed as special initial operations. Are simultaneously operated to return the movable member unit 820 to the initial position.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the next priority after the group B, which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit 820 that has performed the special initial operation. After that, it returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the initial operation for all the movable effect devices according to the priority, but the initial operation is not performed for the group B because the special initial operation of the movable member unit 820 is performed. The initial operation of only the first upper movable member 848 is performed. That is, in this case, for the movable member unit 820, the initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 146 (d) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 is not in the normal detection state, that is, when only the movable member unit (left) is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the movable member unit (left) to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the next priority after the group B, which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit (left) that has performed the special initial operation.

After that, it returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the normal initial operation, and then performs the normal initial operation of the group B. Here, in Group B, the movable member unit (left) is performing a special initial operation, but since it is necessary to operate the movable member unit (right) and the movable member unit (left) at the same time, the group B Normally, the initial operation is performed.

That is, when either one of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 is not in the normal detection state, first, only the movable member unit (left or right) corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state is restored. .. In this case, since the other movable member unit (left or right) does not perform the special initial operation, both movable member units (left and right) including the movable member unit (left or right) that later performs the return operation are performed. ) Is usually the initial operation.

Although the return priority is set to the order closest to the display device 41, the order may be other than this. For example, when there are movable effect devices that interfere with each other, such as when the operating ranges overlap, the return priority may be set so that a problem due to interference does not occur. For example, when the two movable effect devices are not in the initial positions and the return operation of one movable effect device collides with the other movable effect device, the other movable effect device returns first. Set the return priority so that it does.

Further, the return priority may be set so that the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having the largest area overlapping with the display device 41. In the case of the present embodiment, since the area where the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 overlap with the display device 41 is the largest, the return priority is set to the highest. Hereinafter, the area overlapping the display device 41 becomes smaller in the order of the movable member unit 820, the second lower movable member 770, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the first lower movable member 740, 741. Set so that the return priority is lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation where the display content cannot be seen by the movable effect device when the display of the display device 41 is started.

Further, the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having a large area overlapping with the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85, which is the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays the identification information in the substantially center of the display area of the display device 41. The return priority may be set so as to perform. In the case of the present embodiment, since the movable member unit 820 has the largest area overlapping with the display area of the decorative special figure variation display game, the return priority is set to the highest. Hereinafter, the second lower movable member 770, the first lower movable member 740, 741, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Since the area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative special figure variation display game becomes smaller in order, the return priority is set to be lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Further, as the decorative special figure variable display game, the first decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variablely displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 provided in the substantially center of the display area of the display device 41, and the first decorative special figure variable display game. 1 When executing the second decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variablely displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 provided at a position closer to the periphery of the display area than the decorative special figure variable display game. The return priority may be set according to the area that overlaps only with one of the decorative special figure variation display games, or the return priority may be set in consideration of the overlapping area for both decoration special figure variation display games. You may do so. For example, when the second decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed before the first decoration special figure fluctuation display game after the power is turned on, the game returns according to the area overlapping only with the second decoration special figure fluctuation display game. It is preferable to set the priority.

In addition, when a special initial operation is performed, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group that has the next priority after the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, after performing the special initial operation, the initial operation may be sequentially performed in order of priority from the group A having the first priority. Further, immediately after the special initial operation is performed, the initial operation may be performed for the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation. Further, the initial operation may be performed from a group having a large area overlapping with the display area, or from a group having a large area overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85.

Next, an alternative initial operation performed when there is a malfunction during the initial operation will be described. In the present embodiment, when there is a malfunction in the initial operation of the group B, it is possible to substitute another operation in the group B as the initial operation.

FIG. 147 (a) shows the normal initial operation of Group B. In this normal initial operation, first, as step 1, the movable member unit 820 is lowered from the state where the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial positions (see FIG. 9). It is assumed that the machine has been moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 10). Next, as step 2, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated (see FIG. 11), and as process 3, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 10). After that, as step 4, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

In the normal initial operation of this group B, if there is an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not descend to the operation completion position in the process 1, the operation failure error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set and an alternative initial operation is set. .. In this case, the alternative initial operation 1 shown in FIG. 147 (b) is set. In this alternative initial operation 1, first, as step 5, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated, and as process 6, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position. Then, as step 7, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. The process 7 is performed when the movable member unit 820 operates from the initial position but does not operate until the operation completion position, and when the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position. Absent.

Further, if there is an operation failure in which the first upper movable member 848 does not rotate in the process 2 in the normal initial operation of the group B or the process 5 in the alternative initial operation 1, the operation failure error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set. And set the alternative initial operation. In this case, the alternative initial operation 2 shown in FIG. 147 (c) is set. In this alternative initial operation 2, first, the second upper movable member 860 is swung as a process 8, and the second upper movable member 860 is returned to the initial position as a process 9. After that, as step 10, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Note that step 10 is not performed when the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position and has a malfunction.

Further, if there is a malfunction in which the second upper movable member 860 does not swing in the process 8 in the alternative initial operation 2 of the group B, the malfunction error flag of the second upper movable member 860 is set and the alternative initial operation is performed. Set. In this case, the alternative initial operation 3 shown in FIG. 147 (d) is set. In this alternative initial operation 3, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed as the process 11. It should be noted that this is not performed when the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position and has a malfunction.

If there is a malfunction in the process other than this, it is treated as if there is no alternative initial operation. For example, if there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not return to the initial position in the process 3 of the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set, but the alternative initial operation is set. Instead, move to process 4. Further, if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not rise to the initial position in the process 4 of the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set, but the alternative initial operation is not set. In this case, the ascending of the movable member unit 820 may be abandoned and the initial operation of the group C may be performed, or an error notification may be performed to stop the initial operation. It should be noted that the alternative initial operation may be performed immediately when there is a malfunction, or the alternative initial operation may be performed after retrying several times for the malfunctioning operation.

That is, when the operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 performs the first initial operation and the first initial operation cannot be normally executed, the second initial operation of swinging the second upper movable member 860 is performed. It means that the operation is executed. Further, if the first initial operation for rotating the first upper movable member 848 can be normally executed, the second initial operation for swinging the second upper movable member 860 is not executed.

[Operation alternative processing]
FIG. 148 shows an operation substitution process (step C393) in the above-mentioned variation effect setting process (see FIG. 127). In this operation substitution process, when the above-mentioned alternative initial operation is performed, it is possible to replace the operation that was malfunctioning with the alternative operation. In this operation substitution process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect operation set as the effect such as the advance notice effect or the variation effect is subject to the operation failure error flag (step C501). The malfunction error flag is set corresponding to the movable member that malfunctioned in the initial operation. It indicates that the movable member for which this malfunction error flag is set cannot operate normally.

When there is no target of the operation failure error flag in the effect operation (step C501; N), the operation substitution process ends. Further, when the effect operation is subject to the operation failure error flag (step C501; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an alternative operation (step C502). The alternative operation in the present embodiment corresponds to the operation of the second upper movable member 860 when the second upper movable member 860 is operable when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning. Further, when the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are malfunctioning, the operation of only moving the movable member unit 820 up and down corresponds to the operation.

When there is an alternative operation (step C502; Y), the operation targeted by the operation failure error flag is replaced with the alternative operation (step C503), and the operation substitution process ends. If there is no alternative operation (step C502; N), the operation alternative process ends. That is, when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the effect operation for operating the first upper movable member 848 is selected, the first if the second upper movable member 860 is operable. Instead of the operation of the upper movable member 848, the operation of the second upper movable member 860 is performed. In this case, if the second upper movable member 860 is also malfunctioning, the operation is only to move the movable member unit 820 up and down. Further, if the movable member unit 820 is also malfunctioning, there is no alternative operation, so that the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, and the movable member unit 820 are not operated.

Further, if the operation of the movable member is selected when the movable member other than the first movable member 848 is malfunctioning, the operation of the movable member is not performed because there is no alternative operation. The operation of the movable effect device may be set as an alternative operation. For example, when the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, or the fourth central movable effect member 930 is malfunctioning, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member unit 820 is movable. The operation of the member 848 or the second upper movable member 860 may be set as an alternative operation. Further, although the movable effect device is used to perform the alternative operation, the alternative effect may be performed by the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED, the output of sound, or the like.

If there are many operation modes, the third initial operation when the second initial operation cannot be normally executed and the initial operation after that may be set. Further, although the normal initial operation and the alternative initial operation are operations that may be executed in the game, the initial operation may include an operation that is not likely to be executed in the game.

In addition, instead of changing the effect once set in the operation substitution process, if there is an operation failure error flag, the effect is selected using a table in which the operation corresponding to the operation failure error flag is not included in the options. You may try to do it.

From the above, in a game machine that executes a game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, a predetermined effect is produced. Movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, A second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device are provided to control the effect. The means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power-on, and the initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation. If the first initial operation can be normally executed, the second initial operation is not performed, and if the first initial operation cannot be normally executed, the second initial operation can be executed. Therefore, the initial operation can be simplified, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened, and the game can be started quickly.

Further, the first initial operation and the second initial operation are operations that can be executed in the production of the game, and the first initial operation is an operation that suggests that the player is in a more advantageous state than the second initial operation. There will be. Therefore, it is possible to first confirm the operation of the operation suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, as the effect control means, when the first initial operation was not normally completed in the initial operation but the second initial operation was normally completed, the operation corresponding to the first initial operation was selected in the effect of the game. In this case, the operation corresponding to the second initial operation is performed instead of the operation corresponding to the first initial operation. Therefore, the influence on the production of the game can be minimized, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be prevented.

Further, in the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, when there is a malfunction in the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag is immediately set to set the alternative initial operation, but the malfunction error flag is set. If there is a malfunction in the normal initial operation before the set or the set of the alternative initial operation, the normal initial operation or the operation for confirming the malfunction may be performed again as the retry operation. If no malfunction is detected in this retry operation, it is assumed that the operation is normal, and the malfunction error flag and the alternative initial operation are not set. If a malfunction is detected even in the retry operation, the malfunction error flag is set or the alternative initial operation is set. Since the retry operation is performed, it is not necessary to perform the alternative initial operation.

The normal initial operation, special initial operation, retry operation, and alternative initial operation shall be included in the operations referred to as initial operations in FIGS. 139 to 144, and all of the normal initial operation, special initial operation, retry operation, and alternative initial operation shall be included. With the end point as the end of the initial operation, whether or not the effect operation of the movable effect device can be performed and the execution mode of the operation-compatible effect are determined.

From the above, based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special advantage is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that generates a game state, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game based on information from the game control means. A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit) capable of executing an effect operation controlled by the effect control means to operate the movable effect member according to the progress of the game. 820, 1st upper movable member 848, 2nd upper movable member 860, 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930) The game control means can retain information even in a power failure state, and the game can be restarted based on the information held when the power failure is restored. The effect control means is a movable effect device based on the recovery of the power failure. The game control means interrupts the game when a power failure occurs during the execution of the game, restarts the game when the power failure is restored, and the effect control means is special. When the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the resulting game, and the initial operation of the movable production device started with the restoration of the power failure is completed by the end of the restarted game. If no abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state, and if an abnormality is detected by the initial operation, it is movable even after the start of the special game state. This means that the production operation of the production device is made impossible. Therefore, if normal operation is possible, the production operation of the movable production device can be performed as soon as possible after the power failure is restored, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent inadvertent movements in the restarted game, prevent inconsistencies in the production, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, in the special game state, the operation can be performed as usual, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, if there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the gaming machine by disabling it from operating.

In addition, when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, which is a special result, the effect control means completes the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the restoration of the power failure by the time the result is displayed. In this case, if no abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the result display, and if an abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the result display is displayed. Even after the start, the production operation of the movable production device is made impossible. Therefore, when the initial operation is completed early, the production operation can be started early, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, if there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the gaming machine by disabling it from operating.

Further, the effect control means is configured to perform a retry operation when an abnormality is detected in the initial operation, and when an abnormality is not detected in the retry operation, it is assumed that no abnormality is detected in the initial operation. It means that it was done. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality can be accurately determined.

Further, for a movable effect device whose existing position differs depending on the game state, the initial operation may not be performed depending on the situation. For example, in the case of a movable effect device whose operation is controlled so that the probability state, which is one of the gaming states, is in the initial position when the probability state is low, and is not in the initial position when the probability state is high. Even if it is not in the initial position when the power is turned on, if the effect control device 300 can grasp that the probability state is a high probability state, the initial operation including the special initial operation (return operation) should not be performed. Then, the movable effect device may be kept in the same position. As a result, it is possible to omit the initial operation and restart the game quickly.

The case where the probability state can be grasped as the high probability state is, for example, the case where the game control device 100 receives a power failure recovery command indicating that the state before the power failure has normally returned, or the information on the probability state. This is a case where information indicating that the state is in a high probability state is received. On the contrary, when the RAM initialization command is received, the probability state becomes a low probability state, so if it is not in the initial position, a special initial operation is performed. In addition to the probability state, the game state includes whether or not the time is shortened, the effect mode, and whether or not the latent probability is changed. Even for the movable effect device whose existing position differs depending on these states, if the game state can be grasped, the initial operation including the special initial operation is not performed, and the movable effect device is kept in the same position. You may do so.

Further, not only the initial operation may not be performed according to the game state, but also the return priority may be changed according to the game state. That is, an initial operation table may be provided according to the gaming state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in a high probability state or a time saving state. In some cases, it is arranged at an operation completion position that overlaps the front side of the display device 41, and is controlled so as to temporarily return to the initial position when the reach state develops. In addition, it is arranged in the initial position when it is not in the high probability state or the time saving state, and is controlled to temporarily operate to the operation completion position when the reach state develops. Since the central movable effect member may be arranged at the operation completion position for a long time in this way, a magnet is provided on the end face of each central movable effect member facing the adjacent central movable effect member, and the attractive force of the magnet causes the magnet to be provided. Each central movable effect member is assisted in being maintained at the operation completion position.

If each of these central movable effect members is not in the initial position before the start of the initial operation and it can be grasped that the state is in the high probability state or the time saving state, the return priority is set to the lowest. Select the initial operation table in which the initial operation is defined according to the return priority. In this case, since each central movable effect member does not have to be in the initial position, there is no problem as it is, and rather it is better to give priority to the return operation of other movable effect devices. The return priority of the central movable effect member is set to be the lowest.

In addition, when it is not possible to grasp that the state is in the high probability state or the time saving state, or when it is grasped that the state is not in these states (normal probability state and not the time saving state), the return priority is set to the highest. , Select the initial operation table in which the initial operation is defined according to this return priority. In this case, each central movable effect member must be in the initial position, and since each central movable effect member is close to the display device 41 and has a large area to cover, it is necessary to give priority to the return operation. The return priority of each central movable effect member is set to be the highest.

Further, although the initial operation is always performed when the power is turned on, the initial operation may not be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, if a power failure recovery command is received when the power is turned on, the power failure is restored normally, so the movable production device is considered to have no problem and the initial operation is not performed, and when the RAM initialization command is received when the power is turned on. Only the initial operation may be performed.

Further, when a power failure occurs and is restored during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game that is restarted when the power failure is restored. Further, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game newly started after the power failure is restored. In this case, the initial operation may be performed regardless of the progress of the effect, or the initial operation may be performed in response to the progress of the effect. Further, all the initial operations may be performed in one special figure variation display game, or the initial operations may be distributed across a plurality of special figure variation display games. When performing the initial operation in response to the progress of the effect, set a specific effect including the operation of the movable effect device so that the operation as the initial operation can be executed as the effect of the special figure variation display game. To. In addition, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game and the game is restored, the initial operation is not performed only on the condition that the power is turned on, but the special figure fluctuation display is displayed after the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game.

Further, as a special initial operation for the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, the movable effect device may be operated so as to join the normal initial operation from the position where the movable effect device is stopped. Normally, the initial operation is an operation of returning to the initial position after operating from the initial position to the maximum operation position. Therefore, the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation is in the state of being stopped in the middle of the process of performing this normal initial operation. Therefore, of the normal initial operations, the operation from the initial position to the position where the movable effect device is stopped may be omitted and the remaining operations may be performed.

Further, although the detection sensor can detect that the movable effect device is in the initial position, it may be able to detect not only the initial position but also other specific positions, and the entire operating range may be detected. It may be possible to detect which position is located over the range, and the mode of the initial operation may be set according to the detected position. Further, the normal detection state is the detection state when the movable effect device is in the initial position, but the detection state when the movable effect device should be in the position when the power is turned on may be set as the normal detection state. Does not necessarily have to be the initial position.

Further, although the initial operation of the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 has been described here, when the movable effect device is provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, this movable effect device can also be applied. is there. Further, although the pachinko gaming machine has been described, it can be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines as long as they have a movable effect device.

From the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is determined. In the generated game machine, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) that performs a predetermined effect operation. , 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930), and a position detecting means (first) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device. ~ 7th detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is powered on. When the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is in the predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the initial operation is performed. When the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation. It will be. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and position detection means corresponding to each of the movable effect devices are provided. The effect control means is a movable effect in which the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is in a normal detection state. For the device, the normal initial operation may be performed as the initial operation, and for the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the special initial operation may be performed instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. You have made it possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, when all the detection results by each position detecting means before the start of the initial operation are in the normal detection state, the effect control means causes a plurality of movable effect devices to perform the normal initial operation in a predetermined order, and initially If at least one of the detection results by the position detecting means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detecting means is not in the normal detection state is subjected to a special initial operation, and then the other movable devices are sequentially moved. This means that the production device is initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as interference with other movable effect devices by operating from a movable effect device that is not in a normal position. In addition, by performing the special initial operation one by one, the operation can be confirmed one by one, and it becomes easy to grasp the abnormal state.

Further, the position detecting means can detect that the movable effect device is in the initial position, and the state in which the movable effect device is detected in the initial position is set as the normal detection state, and the effect control means is usually in the initial position. As an operation, an operation of returning to the initial position after operating from the initial position is performed, and as a special initial operation, only an operation of returning to the initial position is performed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a game in which a game in which identification information is variablely displayed is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is generated. The machine is provided with a plurality of movable effect devices that perform a predetermined effect operation, a position detecting means that can detect the position of each movable effect device, and an effect control means that controls the operation of the movable effect device. The means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power-on, and when a plurality of the detection results by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation are not in the normal detection state, the detection result by the position detection means. It means that the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state are operated one by one so as to be in the normal detection state. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormal state of the game machine.

Further, the display device 41 for displaying the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means displays when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detecting means are not in the normal detection state are operated so as to be in the normal detection state one by one. It means that the operation is performed according to a predetermined order so as to operate from the movable effect device close to the device 41. Therefore, the situation that hinders the visibility of the display can be quickly resolved. As a result, the timing at which the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 becomes visible is earlier, and the restart of the game can be accelerated, and the timing at which the abnormality notification on the display device 41 becomes visible is also earlier, which is abnormal. Can be grasped quickly.

Further, the effect control means is predetermined so as not to interfere with other movable effect devices when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detection means are not in the normal detection state are operated so as to be in the normal detection state one by one. It means that the operations are performed according to the order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of interfering with other movable effect devices due to the operation.

Further, a display device 41 for displaying an effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means can display on the display device 41 a decorative variable display game for stopping and displaying the result mode after displaying a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner corresponding to the game. Therefore, when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detection means are not in the normal detection state are operated so as to be in the normal detection state one by one, the movable effect device that has a large overlap with the display area of the decoration variation display game is operated. This means that the operations are performed according to a predetermined order. Therefore, the situation that hinders the visibility of the game can be quickly resolved.

Further, the display device 41 for displaying the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means displays when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detecting means are not in the normal detection state are operated so as to be in the normal detection state one by one. The operation is performed according to a predetermined order so as to operate from the movable effect device having a large overlapping range with the device 41. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the display (decorative special figure variation display game, abnormality notification, etc.).

Next, the effect of the display device 41 will be described. First, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. In the upper left portion of the display area, a second decoration game display unit 88 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 is the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85. After the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, it is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, a storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided in the lower center of the display area. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the first start memory and a second storage display unit 83b for displaying the second start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the memory order. Here, there are four first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested.

Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the second start memory on a one-to-one basis, similarly to the first storage display unit 83a. Here, it is shown that there are three second start memories.

On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a or the second storage display unit 83b is transferred to the running storage display unit 84, and the special figure is executed. Fluctuation display The result of the game, the fluctuation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode.

A start memory number display unit 86 for displaying the start memory number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The start memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first start memory number display unit 86a for displaying the number of first start memories and a second start memory number display unit 86b for displaying the number of second start memories. ing. Further, in the upper center of the display area, an effect mode display unit 89 for displaying the current effect mode is provided. Here, it is shown that the time saving mode is the mode in the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, a remaining number display unit 73 indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is provided. The remaining number display unit 73 is one of the numerical displays for displaying the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses.

Next, an update of the numerical display for displaying the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses will be described. The game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses includes the number of start memories, the number of remaining special figure fluctuation displays that can be executed in a time-saving state, and the special figure fluctuation display executed regardless of a specific game state or game state. The number of games can be mentioned. In addition, the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed until the special figure variation display game based on the specific start memory is executed, the time until the occurrence of a specific event, the points that can be obtained according to the game, and the number of shots of the game ball. , The number of prizes, the number of prize balls, etc. In addition, the number of rounds in the special game state, the number of consecutive villas, which is the number of times the special result is continuously derived from the derivation of the special result in the non-time saving state, and the number of consecutive villas, which is the number of times the special result is continuously derived in the time saving state In the special figure variation display game, the number of times of re-variation execution in the so-called pseudo-continuous pattern in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed can be mentioned. With respect to game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses, it is possible to display a numerical display on the display device 41 for displaying the numerical value numerically.

In FIG. 149 (a), the start memory number display unit 86 displays the start memory number by numerical display. In addition, the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed by numerical display on the remaining number of times display unit 73. The numerical display on the remaining number display unit 73 is composed of numerical information indicating a numerical value and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value. For example, the remaining number display unit 73 shown in FIG. 149 (a) displays "96". Makes numerical information, and the "remaining" and "times" parts make additional information. The numerical information and the additional information have different layers on which each image is arranged when the VDP 312 constitutes an image, and when updating the numerical value, only the numerical information layer needs to be updated.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b) to (j), the advance notice display unit 74 indicates the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed until the special figure variation display game based on the specific start memory is executed as the look-ahead effect. It can be displayed by the display. In this numerical display, a numerical value is set based on a look-ahead command from the game control device 100.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b), when a new second start memory is generated during the execution of the special figure variation display game and the second start memory is subject to the notice, the notice display unit 74 indicates "4 more chances". "Times" is displayed. Here, the second start memory number display unit 86b also performs a notice effect of changing the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the target start memory. The display on the notice display unit 74 is also composed of numerical information indicating a numerical value (“4” in FIG. 149 (b)) and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value (“after chance”, “times”). ..

When the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 149 (c) and the special figure variation display game ends, a new special figure variation display game is started based on the second start memory as shown in FIG. 149 (d). The decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 starts variable display of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and the second decorative game display unit 88 also starts variable display in each of the left, middle, and right regions. The variable display of the identification information is started. Further, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b is displayed to flow into the running memory display unit 84, and at the same time, the start memory number display unit 86, which is one of the numerical displays, displays. The numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 86b is reduced by one.

At this time, it is easy to understand that the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 86b is enlarged and displayed and updated. The enlarged display is a numerical display to be updated that is displayed larger than when it is not the update timing, but may be displayed larger than other numerical displays. Further, at this stage, the display on the remaining number display unit 73 and the display on the notice display unit 74, which are other numerical displays, have not been updated.

When the update in the start memory number display unit 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display in the notice display unit 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149 (e). At this time, the notice display unit 74 is enlarged and displayed so that it is easy to understand that it has been updated. Further, when the update on the notice display unit 74, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display on the remaining number display unit 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149 (f). At this time, the remaining number display unit 73 is enlarged and displayed so that it can be easily understood that the update is performed. When updating these numerical displays, other numerical displays are not updated at the same time.

After that, when the special figure variation display game based on the two consecutive second start memories is executed, the numerical display is updated in the same manner as in FIGS. 149 (d) to (f). Then, when starting the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified, similarly, from the state where the result of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed as shown in FIG. 149 (g), FIG. 149 As shown in (h), the start storage number display unit 86 and the storage display unit 83 are updated. Here, the pre-reading effect is performed by changing the display mode in the storage display unit 83, and the running memory display unit 84 is also in a state of giving a notice according to the display mode.

When the update on the start memory number display unit 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display on the notice display unit 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149 (i). Here, since the running special figure fluctuation display game is the special figure fluctuation display game to be announced, the numerical value is 0, so the numerical display is terminated and only the notice display for the running special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Do. Further, when the update on the notice display unit 74, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display on the remaining number display unit 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149 (j).

In this way, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, the update timing of each is different, so that the player can easily grasp the update of the display. In particular, as shown in FIG. 149, when a plurality of numerical display updates have the same trigger (here, the start of the special figure variation display game), the update timings are different for each, so that they are updated at the same time. It is possible to easily grasp the update of the display that was supposed to be displayed.

In FIG. 149, the update timings are different for all of the numerical displays, but some of the numerical displays may be updated at the same time, and the numerical display for which the player wants to grasp the update may be performed. Should not be updated at the same time. For example, the remaining number display unit 73 and the notice display unit 74 may be updated at the same time, but the start storage number display unit 86 may not be updated at the same time. In addition, although a plurality of numerical values are not updated at the same time, it is possible to make the update start timing different. For example, after starting the update of one numerical display, the update of the other numerical display may be started before the update is completed. That is, the update may be started sequentially.

In addition, when multiple numerical displays with the same update trigger are sequentially updated, the numerical display waiting for the update has a value different from the actual numerical value, but since it is a short time, a problem may occur. However, a display may be provided to prevent misidentification of the player. For example, a specific display may be added as a display indicating that the update is waiting, or the display mode of the numerical display may be different. Further, for example, in the period until the update of the numerical display from FIGS. (D) to (f) is completed, the result of the previous decorative special figure variation display game is shaken by the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85. It may be displayed and changed to be displayed after all the updates are completed.

Further, although the case where the time is shortened is described here as an example, a plurality of numerical values can be displayed even when the time is not shortened. The remaining number display unit 73 is not displayed when the time is not shortened, but the notice display unit 74 and the start memory number display unit 86 can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display numerical values for other items whose numerical values change as the game progresses.

FIG. 150 shows another aspect of the display of the notice display unit 74. As shown in FIG. 150A, when a new second start memory is generated during the execution of the special figure variation display game and the second start memory is subject to advance notice, the time value is displayed on the notice display unit 74. To. This time value is the time until the result is derived in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified, and here, it is shown to be 10.00 seconds. The display on the notice display unit 74 is also composed of numerical information (“10”, “00” in FIG. 150 (a)) indicating a numerical value and additional information (“:”) indicating the content of the numerical value.

At the start of the notice, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game based on each start memory has not been determined, so the time value here is an approximate value, and the time value is appropriately corrected according to the progress of the game. .. Since the effect control device 300 can grasp the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the information of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the time value is corrected based on the information.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b), the time value on the notice display unit 74 also decreases with the passage of time, and when the result is displayed and the special figure variation display game ends, as shown in FIG. 2 A new special figure variation display game is started based on the start memory. Further, the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 starts variable display of the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and the second decorative game display unit 88 also starts the variable display of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display of the identification information is started in each case. Further, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b is displayed to flow into the running memory display unit 84, and at the same time, the start memory number display unit 86, which is one of the numerical displays, displays. The numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 86b is reduced by one. At this time, it is easy to understand that the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 86b is enlarged and displayed and updated. Further, during the period for updating the start storage number display unit 86, the display on the remaining number display unit 73, which is another numerical display, is not updated, and the update of the time value on the notice display unit 74 is stopped. It is said that.

When the update on the start memory number display unit 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display on the remaining number display unit 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 150 (d). At this time, the remaining number display unit 73 is enlarged and displayed so that it can be easily understood that the update is performed. Even during the period for updating the remaining number display unit 73, the update of the time value in the notice display unit 74 is in a stopped state. Then, when the update in the remaining number display unit 73 is completed, the update of the time value in the notice display unit 74 is restarted as shown in FIG. 150 (e). In this case, the time value displayed in the state where the update is stopped (8.65 seconds in FIG. 150 (d)) is updated to the value obtained by subtracting the time of the period in which the update was stopped (Fig. 150). In (e), 7.56 seconds), the update in which the time value is subtracted is started from here. When the time value of the notice display unit 74 is updated, other numerical displays are not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (f), when the time value of the notice display unit 74 becomes 0 seconds, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the notice target is derived. Here, special results are derived. Here, the time value until the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the notice target is derived is shown in the notice display unit 74, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence or identification of the reach state is not limited to this. Anything that displays the time value until the occurrence of a specific event, such as the start timing of the production of.

Also in this example, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, the update timing of each is different so that the player can easily grasp the update of the display. The notice display unit 74 is not updated during the update of the start memory number display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73, but in this example, the start memory number display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73 and the notice are given. Since the update of the time value of the display unit 74 has different update triggers and update intervals, it is difficult to confuse the two, and a notice display is displayed even while the start memory number display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73 are being updated. Part 74 may be updated.

Further, when the numerical value of the remaining number display unit 73 and the numerical value display in which the numerical value decreases due to the update such as the numerical value in the notice display unit 74 are displayed at the same time, the numerical value decreases due to any update trigger. It is difficult to determine whether or not, but by making the update timing different as described above, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring. The same applies when the numerical value is increased by updating any of the plurality of numerical display. In the above example, the display of the start memory number display unit 86 whose numerical value increases or decreases due to the update is also included, but such a start memory number display unit 86 is not displayed, and all the displayed numerical values are displayed. As the game progresses, all the numerical values displayed may increase or all the numerical values displayed may decrease. In addition, when displaying two numerical displays, if one numerical display is updated to increase the numerical value and the other numerical display is updated to decrease the numerical value, it is easy to update each other's numerical display. It becomes possible to distinguish.

Further, a sound may be emitted when the numerical display is updated. In this case, the sound emitted may be different depending on the numerical display to be updated. Further, the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be made to emit light when the numerical display is updated. In this case, the light emission mode may be different depending on the numerical display to be updated.

[Numeric display update process]
FIG. 151 shows a numerical display update process performed in the effect display editing process (step C13) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in the effect control device 300. In this numerical display update process, first, it is determined whether the numerical display is performed (step C521), and if the numerical display is not performed (step C521; N), the numerical display update process ends. Further, when the numerical value is displayed (step C521; Y), it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the game information for which the numerical value is displayed has been updated (step C522).

If the numerical value has not been updated (step C522; N), the process proceeds to step C524. When the numerical value is updated (step C522; Y), the update flag of the target numerical display is set, and it is determined whether or not there is a numerical display being updated (step C524). At this point, the numerical value of the game information has been updated, but the corresponding numerical display has not been updated yet.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a numerical display being updated (step C524), and if there is a numerical display being updated (step C524; Y), the numerical display update process is terminated. That is, multiple numerical displays are not updated at the same time. If there is no numerical display being updated (step C524; N), the numerical display with the update flag with the higher priority is updated (step C525), and the update flag of the updated numerical display is cleared. (Step C526), the numerical display update process is completed.

The priority may be set in advance for all of the numerical displays that can be displayed, or may be set relative to the displayed numerical values. In addition, the priority order may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be changed according to a change in the game state such as a time saving state or a high probability state, or a production content or result of a special figure variation display game being executed. Is possible.

FIG. 152 shows a display mode when the value of the remaining number display unit 73 decreases as an example of the display mode when the value of the numerical display decreases. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the special figure variation display game that can be executed in a short time state is executed five times, and the special figure variation display game is completed as shown in FIG. 152 (b). As shown in (c), when the next special figure variation display game is started, the start storage number display unit 86 is first updated.

Then, when the remaining number display unit 73 is updated, the updated value becomes 4 or less, which is the upper limit value of one of the start memories, so that the display mode is different from the display mode shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. It is regarded as an aspect. As shown in FIG. 152 (d), the display mode at this time is displayed and displayed on the center side of the display area so that the remaining number display unit 73 is farther from the start memory number display unit 86 than the display position up to that point. A frame line surrounding the remaining number display unit 73 is displayed so as to partition the area. The numerical value is updated in such a different display mode, and then the remaining number display unit 73 is erased as shown in FIG. 152 (e).

The remaining number display unit 73 is not displayed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the special figure variation display game ends as shown in FIG. 152 (f), and the following special figure is shown as shown in FIG. 152 (g). When the variation display game is started and the update timing of the remaining number display unit 73 is reached as shown in FIG. 152 (h), the remaining number display unit 73 is displayed and the numerical value is updated. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (j), the remaining number display unit 73 is erased again. After that, the same display is performed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in a time-saving state is twice or once.

As described above, when the numerical value of the numerical display is equal to or less than the upper limit of the starting memory number, the display mode is different, so that the player can prevent the player from confusing the numerical value of the numerical display with the starting memory number. In particular, when the value of the numerical display becomes equal to or less than the upper limit of the starting memory number, the player can be effectively prevented from being confused by not displaying the numerical display except when updating.

It should be noted that the display mode of the numerical display is different when the numerical value of the numerical display becomes 4, which is the upper limit of the start memory of one of them, but the sum of the upper limits of the start memory of the special figures 1 and 2. The display mode of the numerical display may be different with respect to the value of 8. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed, the game progresses mainly mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game except in the time saving state, and the special drawing in the time saving state. 2 The game progresses mainly in the variable display game. Therefore, since the upper limit value of the start memory that the player is aware of is the upper limit value of one of the start memories, the display mode of the numerical display is changed with this upper limit value as a boundary. In the case of a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order in which the start memory is generated, the upper limit of the start memory that the player is aware of is the upper limit of the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Since the total value is 8, in this case, it is preferable to make the display mode of the numerical display different at the boundary of 8.

Further, since the purpose is to prevent the player from confusing the numerical value of the numerical display with the starting memory number, the display mode is such that confusion is prevented when at least the numerical value is equal to or less than the upper limit of the starting memory number. The boundary for changing the display mode may be a value larger than the upper limit value of the start memory.

Further, the display mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 152, and the display mode may be different before and after the numerical value of the numerical display reaches a predetermined value. Examples of the different elements include the display position, the display size, the display color, the display angle, and the presence / absence of a border for dividing the display area. Further, the target for which the display mode is different is not limited to the display on the remaining number display unit 73, and all numerical display may be targeted.

FIG. 153 shows another aspect of the numerical display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the remaining number display unit 73 is displayed to imitate the time value. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), the notice display unit 74, which is a numerical display that displays the time value until the occurrence of a specific event, displays the values so as to be sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. By determining the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, if there is a difference between the displayed time value and the actual time value, it will be the actual time value. Corrections may be made, in which case the time values may be discontinuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the remaining number display unit 73, which displays the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in a time-saving state by displaying a time value, is a numerical value in seconds. Is designed to display the number of times the special figure variation display game that can be executed in a short time state is executed, and the numerical value in units of 1/100 second is changed for decoration. For example, the display of 75: 00 to 75:99 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is 75 times. The display in units of 1/100 changes so as to gradually increase contrary to the display on the notice display unit 74, and is 75:99 at the timing when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is not updated. If it becomes, it will return to 75:00 next.

In addition, at the timing when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is updated, the numerical value in seconds is subtracted. At this time, the display of the unit of 1/100 is taken over as it is. For example, when the display is 75:02 and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is updated, the display is then 74:03. The unit of 1/100 may be reset to 00 so that it becomes 74:00.

From the above, the production control that controls the production of the game in the game machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A plurality of effect control means include a means (effect control device 300) and a display device 41 that is controlled by the effect control means and can display game information which is information about the game, and the numerical value changes as the game progresses. It is possible to simultaneously display on the display device 41 a numerical display that displays each of the game information in the game by a numerical value corresponding to the numerical value, and when updating the numerical display of one, the other numerical display is not updated. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the update of each numerical display, it is possible to attract the attention of the player and surely grasp the information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means will have different update intervals of the numerical display corresponding to the plurality of game information. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the update of each numerical display.

In addition, the effect control means also displays additional information that makes it possible to identify which game information the numerical display corresponds to. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the contents of each numerical display.

In addition, the effect control means displays a plurality of game information whose numerical values are displayed on the display device 41 so that all the numerical values displayed increase or all the numerical values decrease as the game progresses. It becomes. Therefore, it becomes easy to predict the change of each numerical display.

In addition, a production control means for controlling the production of a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A display device 41 that is controlled by the effect control means and can display game information, which is information about the game, is provided, and the effect control means uses a number corresponding to the numerical value for the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses. The numerical display to be displayed can be displayed on the display device 41, and the display mode of the numerical display is changed when the numerical value becomes a predetermined value. Therefore, the display mode is changed, the player's attention can be attracted, and the information can be surely grasped, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a start storage means (game control device 100) that stores up to a predetermined upper limit of the start memory that is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). The predetermined value is a value equal to or higher than the upper limit value. Therefore, the display mode is changed and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the start memory display.

Further, the effect control means can display a start memory display indicating the number of start memories on the display device 41, and when updating the start memory display, the numerical display is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the start memory display.

In addition, the numerical value of the game information decreases as the game progresses, and the effect control means continuously displays the numerical value before the numerical value reaches the predetermined value, and when the numerical value is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the numerical value is continuously displayed. The numerical display will not be displayed continuously. Therefore, the display mode is changed and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by setting a predetermined value to a value equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the start memory, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the start memory display.

Next, a character effect that displays a character display corresponding to a sound emitted as a game effect will be described. In this character production, the speakers 19a and 19b emit a sound including a line, and the display device 41 displays a character display 75 in which the line is a character.

As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the variable display is performed in the decorative special figure variable display game, and the board decoration device 46 including the LED is turned off in the state before the reach state is reached. Further, here, the display area is divided into two areas, a first display area 77 and a second display area 78. In the first display area, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 performs variable display, and in the second display area 78, an effect indicating the degree of expectation by the number of stars is performed as an effect corresponding to the decorative special figure variable display game. It has been. By dividing the display area in this way and performing different effects in each area, it is possible to execute various effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the period before the reach state is reached due to the variable display being performed in the decorative special figure variable display game, the character effect as shown in FIGS. 154 (b) to (d) can be executed. In this character effect, the speakers 19a and 19b emit the voice "If you can do it, try it", and at the same time, the character display 75 "If you can do it, try it" is displayed. In addition, the color of the character display 75 suggests a high degree of expectation that gives a special result, and indicates that the degree of expectation is high in the order of blue, green, and red.

When the character effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 154 (b), the sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the blue character display 75 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the board decoration device 46 emits light in blue in accordance with the blue character display 75. In the second display area 78, two stars are displayed as the blue character effect is executed to indicate the degree of expectation. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the color of the character display 75 can be changed to green. A specific voice is output when this color is changed. Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the board decoration device 46 emits light in green in accordance with the green character display 75.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (d), the color of the character display 75 can be changed to red. A specific voice is output when this color is changed. Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the board decoration device 46 emits light in red in accordance with the red character display 75. In the second display area 78, four stars are displayed as the red character effect is executed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased. It should be noted that the change in the color of the character display 75 is due to the suggested degree of expectation, and there are cases where the color remains blue and does not change, or even changes in green. In addition, although it is assumed that a specific voice is output when the color of the character display 75 is changed, the same sound as the sound output at the start of the display of the character display 75 (here, "If you can do it, try it") is output. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), it is in the normal reach state. At this time, in the second display area 78, five stars are displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased. Then, it has evolved from normal reach to SP reach, and as shown in FIG. 154 (f), character production is performed in the reach production. In the character production during the reach production, the speakers 19a and 19b emit the sound of "Well done so far" and the character display 75 of "Well done here" is displayed. In addition, the color of the character display 75 suggests a high degree of expectation that gives a special result, and indicates that the degree of expectation is high in the order of blue, green, and red. However, regardless of the color of the character display displayed as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the emission color of the board decoration device 46 is white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (f), the second display area 78 is erased and becomes only the first display area 77 with the development to SP reach. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed in the entire display area, and a powerful effect can be performed in a wide display area, which is effective in the SP reach, which is a state in which there is a high possibility of a special result. Can be enhanced.

Here, the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect is changed depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state. The character display 75 in the character production in the non-reach state forms the first display mode, and the characters are arranged along a non-horizontal line so as not to be along the peripheral edge of the display area. Further, it is displayed at a position close to the center of the display area and is displayed so as to overlap the identification information that is variablely displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85. Further, the character display is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the character 76. In addition, the size of the characters is not constant and is displayed three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally), and some characters overlap. In addition, the character string can be a plurality of columns.

On the other hand, the character display 75 in the character effect in the reach state forms the second display mode, in which the characters are arranged along the horizontal line and are arranged along the peripheral edge of the display area. Further, the characters are displayed farther from the center of the display area than the character display 75 in the non-reach state. Further, the character display 75 is displayed so as not to overlap the front side of the character 76. In addition, the size of the characters is constant and displayed in a plane (two-dimensional), and the characters do not overlap. In addition, characters smaller than the character display 75 in the non-reach state are displayed. Moreover, the character string is one column.

Since the character production is mainly performed during the period when the character display is not in the reach state, the character display 75 is set to be a prominent display mode in order to have the effect of the effect of the character display 75, and the interest of the game is improved. In particular, the period during which the player is not in the reach state is the period during which the player stays for the longest time to play, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game by enhancing the interest of the production in the production during this period. Further, in the period in the reach state, the character effect is executed as a part of the reach effect such as the character image, and since the reach effect is the main subject, the character display 75 is less noticeable than the period in the non-reach state. It is designed so that it does not interfere with the reach production.

By making the subject of the production different depending on whether or not it is in the reach state, the production has a different taste, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by making the execution mode different depending on the timing of execution of the same character production, it is possible to enrich the variation of the character production and improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect is different depending on whether or not it is in the reach state, an image of the first display mode is prepared in advance for the character effect to be executed in a state other than the reach state, and the reach state. The character effect to be executed in is realized by preparing an image of the second display mode. Further, regarding the character effect to be executed regardless of whether or not it is in the reach state, either the first display mode or the second display mode is selected and executed depending on the execution timing.

The difference in the display mode of the character display 75 depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state is not limited to the above, and may have only a part of the above differences. In addition to the above differences, the font of the characters may be different, or the number of characters that can be displayed may be different.

Further, it may be different whether or not to divide the area for displaying the character information and set the character information display area to distinguish it from other display areas depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state. For example, when not in the reach state, the character information is directly overlapped with the background image without setting the character information display area, and in the reach state, the character information display area is set and the character information is displayed in the character information display area. To do. For example, the character information display area is an area filled with black, and the character information is displayed in a color other than black to display like a subtitle. Further, the character information display area may be displayed even when the character information display area is not in the reach state, and the color of the character information display area may be different depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state, or the period in the reach state. The combination of the color of the character information display area and the color of the character information may be different depending on whether or not the character information is displayed.

Further, although the display mode is different depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the character display 75 is the main body, and the standard is not limited to the reach state. .. For example, in the non-reach state and the normal reach period in the reach state, the character display 75 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 154 (b) to (d), and in the SP reach period developed from the normal reach, FIG. 154 (f). The character display 75 may be displayed as in. Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player. For example, even during the period in which the character display 75 as shown in FIG. 154 (f) is performed, in the case of the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, from FIGS. 154 (b) to (d). The display mode of the character display 75 as shown may be temporarily changed.

Further, the sounds emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b may be sounds that do not include dialogue, and the onomatopoeia of the sound may be displayed as a character display. For example, a bell sound may be emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b, and "Khan" may be displayed as a character display. Further, regarding the second display mode, the expected degree may not be suggested by the color of the characters, and the function of the advance notice may not be provided. That is, if it has a notice function, it may be in the first display mode, and if it does not have the notice function, it may be in the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be different depending on the game state such as the special game state, the high probability state, and the time saving state. Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be different depending on the effect mode that the player can select or the effect mode that the game machine selects. Further, although the color of the character display 75 and the emission color of the board decoration device 46 can be synchronized, the emission color of the frame decoration device 18 may be synchronized.

Further, when the display area is limited to the first display area 77, the effect performed in the second display area 78 may be continuously performed in the first display area 77. Further, although the effect suggests the degree of expectation of the special figure variation display game in which the effect in the second display area 78 is being executed, other effects may be used. For example, the look-ahead effect may be performed together with the storage display unit 83. Further, the second decorative game display unit 88 may be displayed in the second display area 78. Further, although the first display area 77 and the second display area 78 are divided by the marking line, the marking line may not be displayed and a clear boundary may not be shown.

Further, in the non-reach state and the normal reach period, the display area is divided into the first display area 77 and the second display area 78, and in the SP reach, only the first display area 77 is used, but when the display area is changed. Is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, during the period of temporary stop and re-variation in the so-called pseudo-continuous pattern in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed in the decorative special figure variation display game during the execution of one special figure variation display game, only the first display area 77 is used, and other than this. The period may be divided into a first display area 77 and a second display area 78. After the last temporary stop and re-variation in the pseudo-continuous pattern is completed, the number of times the temporary stop and re-variation are executed may be displayed in the second display area.

From the above, the production control that controls the production of the game in the game machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A means (effect control device 300) and a display device 41 that is controlled by the effect control means and can display an effect related to the game are provided, and the effect control means can display character information on the display device 41 as an effect related to the game. Yes, the display mode of the character information is different depending on whether or not it is in the reach state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the production various.

In addition, the effect control means can display the character information along the non-horizontal line during the non-reach state, and the character information is displayed along the horizontal line during the reach state. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the production various. In addition, when the player is not in the reach state, the character information becomes conspicuous and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when it is in the reach state, it can be prevented from interfering with the reach production.

Further, the speakers 19a and 19b that can be controlled by the effect control means to emit sound are provided, and the effect control means can display characters corresponding to the sounds emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b as character information. .. Therefore, the content of the emitted sound can be easily grasped.

Further, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. A display device 41 that is controlled by the effect control means and can display an effect related to the game, and a light emitting means (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46) that can emit light under the control of the effect control means. Is capable of displaying character information on the display device 41 and causing the light emitting means to emit light as an effect related to the game, and the color of the character information and the light emitting color of the light emitting means are set to the same color during the non-reach state. In the period of the reach state, the color of the character information and the color of the light emitting means are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the production various.

Further, the speakers 19a and 19b which are controlled by the effect control means and can emit sound are provided, and the effect control means can change the color of the character information displayed on the display device 41, and the character information can be changed. Sound is emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b in response to the change in the color of. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the change in the color of the character information.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example can resume the initial operation interrupted by the power failure after the power failure is restored.

The gaming machine of this modification is provided with a storage means in the effect control device 300 that can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure. The storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure may be configured by a non-volatile RAM that can retain the stored contents even if there is no power supply such as FeRAM323, or the stored contents if there is no power supply. Even if the volatile RAM 322 cannot be retained, the stored contents may be retained even in the event of a power failure by supplying electric power from the backup power supply as in the game control device 100.

The storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even during the power failure is capable of storing at least information on the initial operation and the operating state of the movable effect device in the initial operation. Then, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power failure is restored.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 155 is performed instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C121). In the game machine of this modification, the initial operation flag is not set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. The power-on flag is set to. That is, the power-on flag is a flag set based on the power-on. If there is no power-on flag (step C121; N), the process proceeds to step C101. If there is a power-on flag (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the backup information is valid (step C122).

As for the storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure, a process of determining whether the stored contents (backup information) at the time of turning on the power is valid is performed. Examples of this determination method include comparing the checksums when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, as in the process of the game control device 100. Then, if the backup information is valid, the information stored in the RAM is used as it is, and if the backup information is not valid, the RAM is initialized. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) is valid at the time of power failure recovery.

When the backup information is valid (step C122; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124). Then, if there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. Since the storage means correctly holds the information before the power failure, this information is used as it is to restart the initial operation interrupted after the power failure is restored. If there is no initial operation executing flag (step C124; N), the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, a power failure occurs when the initial operation is not being executed, and the initial operation is performed based on the power-on this time.

On the other hand, if the backup information is not valid (step C122; N), the initial operation executing flag is cleared (step C123), and the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, the storage means does not correctly hold the information before the power failure, so even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the initial operation is set to start again. To do. If it is determined that the backup information is not valid in the process of checking the validity of the backup information, the stored contents of the storage means are initialized. Therefore, this initialization clears the initial operation executing flag and the initial operation flag. May be set.

As backup information, the time when the power is turned off is stored based on the information of RTC338 so that the time when the power is turned off can be obtained in comparison with the time when the power is turned on, and the backup information is valid and the power is supplied. If the cutoff time is less than the specified time, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed, and even if the backup information is valid, if the power cutoff time is longer than the specified time, the initial operation is performed from the beginning. You may.

From the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is determined. In the generated game machine, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) that performs a predetermined effect operation. , 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect control device) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. 300) and storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) provided in the effect control means and capable of holding the stored contents even in the event of a power failure, so that the effect control means performs the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power is turned on. It is possible to store the information of the initial operation and the operating state of the movable effect device in the initial operation in the storage means, and if a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the power failure is restored. It is possible to resume the initial operation that was interrupted later. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, it is provided with position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and the effect control means becomes a storage means at the time of recovery from a power failure. The legitimacy determining means (effect control device 300) for determining whether the stored information is legitimate is provided, and the legitimacy determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. In this case, if the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is in the predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is performed. If is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modified example can set the initial operation according to the amount of movement required for the return operation.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation processing, when there is an initial operation executing flag (step C108; Y), that is, when the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131). The completion timing of the special initial operation is the timing when the detection sensor is in the normal detection state due to the special initial operation of returning to the initial position. When a special initial operation is performed for a plurality of movable effect devices, it is the timing when the detection sensor of each movable effect device is in the normal detection state.

If it is not the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; N), the process proceeds to step C109. Further, when it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; Y), it is determined whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C132). For detecting the amount of movement, the number of steps required for the stepping motor operating the movable effect device to return the movable effect device to the initial position can be used. In addition to this, the movement amount may be detected based on the time taken to return to the initial position.

Then, when the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (step C132; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, since the amount of movement in the return operation is sufficient and the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted as in the first embodiment. If the amount of movement to the initial position is not equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (step C132; N), a normal initial operation for the movable effect device is set (step C133). In this case, the amount of movement in the return operation is not sufficient, and the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial positions, the initial operation table of FIG. 146 (b) is set by the process of step C106. .. Then, first, the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, and it is determined whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial operation is completed. ..

If the amount of movement until the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are returned to the initial positions is a predetermined amount or more, the initial operation table shown in FIG. 146 (b) is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are returned to the initial positions is less than a predetermined amount, the third execution order of FIG. 146 (b) is performed in the process of step C133. The initial operation in is changed to the one that performs the normal initial operation in the entire group A.

Similarly, when the special initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 is performed, it is determined whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial operation is completed. Then, if the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is a predetermined amount or more, the initial operation table of FIG. 146 (b) or the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 The initial operation table changed by the special initial operation is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is less than a predetermined amount, in the process of step C133, the initial operation in the fifth execution order of FIG. 146 (b) is performed in the entire group C. Change to the one that normally performs the initial operation.

When combined with the configuration of the first modification described above, the movable effect device is in the normal detection state from the backup information for the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state. It is also possible to calculate the amount of operation required up to this point and set whether or not to perform the normal initial operation according to the calculation result. In the first modification, at least the information on the initial operation and the operating state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored, but the movable effect device is always normal because the operating state of the movable effect device other than the initial operation can be stored. It may be possible to calculate the amount of operation required to reach the detection state.

[Initial operation processing]
When combined with the first modification in this way, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 157 is performed instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. 156. The processing of steps C121 to C125 is the same as that of the first modification. Further, in this initial operation process, when all the states of the detection sensors are not the normal detection states (step C104; N), after setting the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation according to the detection state (step C106), the normal operation is performed. Performs the process of setting whether to perform the initial operation.

In this process, first, the amount of movement from the backup information to the initial position is calculated for the movable effect device that performs the special initial operation (step C135). If a plurality of movable effect devices are not in the initial positions, a calculation is performed for each movable effect device. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a calculation means for calculating the amount of operation required for the movable effect device to reach the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage means.

Next, it is determined whether all the movement amounts to the initial positions are equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C136). When all the movement amounts to the initial positions are equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C136; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, since the amount of movement in the return operation is sufficient and the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted.

Further, when the movement amount to the initial position is not all the predetermined amount or more (step C136; N), that is, when the movement amount to the initial position of at least one movable effect device is not the predetermined amount or more, the movement amount is the predetermined amount. For the movable effect device less than, the initial operation table is changed to the normal initial operation (step C137), and the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, there is a movable effect device in which the amount of movement in the return operation is not sufficient, and the initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial positions, the initial operation table of FIG. 146 (b) is set by the process of step C106. .. The amount of movement required to return to the initial position calculated for each is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount for the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and for the second lower movable member 770. If it is less than the predetermined amount, the initial operation in the fifth execution order of FIG. 146 (b) in the process of step C137 is changed to the initial operation table in which the normal initial operation in the entire group C is assumed. To do.

If the backup information is not valid, the amount of movement is unknown. In this case, it is considered that the amount of movement to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, and the movable effect device that is not in the initial position Also, the normal initial operation is performed after the return operation. Further, in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the processes of steps C110 to C112 in FIG. 136 are omitted, but the same as in FIG. 136 may be performed.

From the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is determined. In the generated game machine, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) that performs a predetermined effect operation. , 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930), and a position detecting means (first) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device. ~ 7th detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is powered on. It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the above, and when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is in the predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the initial operation is performed. If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, and the amount of movement required until the normal detection state is reached is a predetermined amount or more. In some cases, the movable effect device is not normally initially operated with the operation as the initial operation, and if the amount of operation required to reach the normal detection state is less than a predetermined amount, the operation is performed after the operation is completed. This means that the movable effect device is normally subjected to the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and position detection means are provided for each of the movable effect devices. The effect control means is a movable effect device in which the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is in a normal detection state. Performs a normal initial operation as an initial operation, and for a movable effect device whose detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, and the normal detection is performed. If the amount of movement required to reach the state is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the movement is regarded as the initial operation of the movable effect device, and the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is not performed until the normal detection state is reached. When the required amount of movement is less than a predetermined amount, it means that the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is performed after the end of the movement. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, the effect control means includes storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) capable of holding the stored contents even in the event of a power failure, can store the operating state of the movable effect device in the storage means, and is a position detecting means before the start of the initial operation. When the detection result is not in the normal detection state, the calculation means is provided with a calculation means (effect control device 300) for calculating the amount of operation required for the movable effect device to be in the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage means. When the amount of motion calculated by the above is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the movable effect device is normally operated by the calculation means without performing the initial operation of the movable effect device with the initial operation of operating the movable effect device until the detection state is reached. If the amount of movement is less than a predetermined amount, it means that the normal initial operation is performed after the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification performs the initial operation based on receiving the control information from the game control means.

[Single-shot command processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed instead of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 122. In this single-shot command processing, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process (step C262) for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed. After that, the initial operation flag is set (step C141), the power-on flag is cleared (step C142), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. The model designation command is a command that is always first transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine is turned on, and is the control information at the time of power on that is transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the power on. It is what makes up.

In the game machine of this modification, the initial operation flag is set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. It is not supposed to be set here. Therefore, the initial operation is performed only when the model specification command is received. Further, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command, the initial operation is not set in the initial operation process and the initial operation is not performed. Further, in the game machine of the present modification, the initial operation flag is saved in the area to be initialized, which is performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine, in the process (step C7). Set the power-on flag to indicate that the power was turned on.

[Received command analysis processing]
Further, instead of the received command analysis process shown in FIG. 121, the received command analysis process shown in FIG. 159 is performed. In this received command analysis process, the return operation process (step C150) is performed when a correct command is received.

[Return operation processing]
FIG. 160 shows a return operation process (step C150) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this return operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C151), and if there is no power-on flag (step C151; N), the return operation process ends. When there is a power-on flag (step C151; Y), the power-on flag is cleared (step C152), the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C153), and all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state. It is determined whether or not there is (step C154). Then, when all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154; Y), the return operation process ends. If all the states of the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C154; N), a special initial operation (return operation) of the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state is set (step C155), and the return operation process is terminated. ..

As described above, the power-on flag is a flag set based on the power-on of the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine, and the effect control device 300 first receives a model designation command from the game control device 100. It is cleared when it is received. When a model designation command is received, the initial operation flag is set and the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed.

However, if the effect control device 300 misses the model designation command for some reason, the initial operation flag is not set and the power-on flag remains set. When a command other than the model designation command is received in such a situation, a return operation for returning the movable effect device that is not in the initial position to the initial position is performed. As a result, if the model specification command is missed when the power is turned on, the initial operation is omitted and only the return operation is performed, so that the time when the game can be normally started is not delayed by the execution of the initial operation. It is possible to perform a return operation so that the movable effect device is not in an abnormal position and affects the game.

In addition, although the command that triggers the return operation is all commands other than the model specification command, it may be limited to a specific command and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the return operation process (step C150) may be performed only when predetermined control information regarding the special figure variation display game is received. Predetermined control information related to the special figure variation display game includes a variable command and a symbol command, which are commands transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game.

By performing the return operation at the start of the special figure variation display game in this way, it is possible to prevent the movable effect device from being in an abnormal position and affecting the execution of the special figure variation display game. That is, it is movable when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the special figure variation display game is started with the movable effect device not in the initial position. It is possible to return the effect device to the initial position so as not to affect the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition to this, predetermined control information related to the special figure fluctuation display game includes a symbol stop command, a command related to an increase / decrease in the number of holds, a command related to the result of pre-reading processing of hold, a jackpot command, and the like, which can be arbitrarily selected. .. Further, when only the return operation is performed without performing the initial operation, the initial operation may be performed based on the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation without affecting the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed and the movable effect device is not in the initial position and receives a command related to the special figure variation display game, In the special figure variation display game, the movable effect device or all the movable effect devices may not be operated. In this case, when it is known that the special figure variation display game has ended, a return operation may be performed to return to the initial position so that the movable effect device can be operated from the next special figure variation display game. Knowing that the special figure variation display game has ended is, for example, when a symbol stop command for the special figure variation display game is received, or when a command for starting the next special figure variation display game is received. ..

From the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is determined. In the generated game machine, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770) that performs a predetermined effect operation. Movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930. ), Position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and movable effect based on control information from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the device is provided, and the effect control means is an initial stage of the movable effect device based on the control information at the time of power-on transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on. When the operation is configured to be performed and the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the position is detected before the start of the initial operation. When the detection result by the means is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, when the effect control means does not receive the control information at the time of power-on transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on, the effect control means does not perform the initial operation of the movable effect device. Therefore, if the start timing of the initial operation is missed, the time until the game can be started can be shortened by not performing the initial operation.

Further, the effect control means is configured to perform an operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position when receiving predetermined control information regarding the game from the game control means. Therefore, when the initial operation is omitted and the game is started, the movable effect device that is not in the normal position can be returned to the initial position.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the movable accessory device can operate in a wider operating range than the operating range in the game.

As shown in FIG. 161, the second lower movable member 770 operates from the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 161 (b) in the production of the game. In the production, it rotates in the range of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (b).

In the gaming machine of this modified example, the second lower movable member 770 is rotatable from the state shown in FIG. 161 (b) to the maximum operating position shown in FIG. 161 (c), and the second lower movable member 770 The actual rotatable range is in the range of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c). That is, the operating range in the production of the game is narrower than the movable range. It should be noted that the range from FIGS. 161 (b) to 161 (c) is not merely rotatable due to play in the structure, but is operated by the effect control device 300 controlling the motor 734. It is a rotatable range. In this example, the maximum operating position can be detected by retracting the second shading plate 773 from the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782 and changing the detection state from OFF to ON.

In the normal initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, after operating from the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a) to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c), the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a) is reached. It is designed to return. By doing so, it is possible to reliably guarantee the operation within the operation range in the production of the game by the initial operation.

Although the second lower movable member 770 is shown here, the operation range of the other movable effect devices is also set to be narrower than the movable range in the effect of the game, and the operation is performed up to the maximum operation position in the initial operation. You can do it. However, in the case of a configuration such as the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that interfere with each other when they are operated to the maximum operating position at the same time. Sets the order of operations in the initial operation so as not to interfere.

Further, when the special initial operation is performed when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), the operation is first opposite to the direction of returning to the initial position. Then, after operating to the maximum operating position shown in FIG. 161 (c), it may be returned to the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a). Further, the operation to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c) in the initial operation is performed only in the special initial operation, and in the case of the normal initial operation, it is performed in the range of FIGS. 161 (a) to (b). Is also good.

Further, when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), a special initial operation for returning to the initial position is performed, but at this time, the special initial operation is in progress. Assuming that it takes time to return to the initial position due to some trouble, it is equipped with a measuring means to measure the time to return to the initial position, and if the measurement result is longer than the predetermined time, the maximum operating position after that. May work up to. The predetermined time referred to here is the time required to return from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and if it is longer than this time, it is considered that a problem such as the movable effect device being caught has occurred. After returning to the position, operate to the maximum operating position and check the operation. Further, in this case, when operating to the maximum operating position after returning to the initial position, the movable effect device may be slowly operated so as to reach the maximum operating position over a longer time than the above-mentioned predetermined time. good. It should be noted that the above-mentioned first embodiment and other modified examples in which the operating range in the production of the game and the operating range in the initial operation match are also applicable.

From the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated game machine, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) that performs a predetermined effect operation. , 1st central movable effect member 900, 2nd central movable effect member 910, 3rd central movable effect member 920, 4th central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect control device) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. 300), the movable effect device can operate in a wider range than the operation range in the effect of the game, and the effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power is turned on. It is possible to make the operating range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operating range of the movable effect device in the game effect. Therefore, by making the operating range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operating range of the movable effect device in the game effect, it is possible to reliably guarantee the operation in the operation range in the game effect.

Further, it is provided with position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and is detected by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation. When the result is not a predetermined detection state, it is possible to perform the initial operation in an operation range wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the effect of the game. Therefore, it can be confirmed that the movable effect device can operate in the operating range in the game effect when the movable effect device is in an abnormal state, and the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 100 Game control device (game control means)
300 effect control device (effect control means)
740, 741 First lower movable member (movable production device)
770 Second lower movable member (movable production device)
820 Movable member unit (movable production device)
848 First upper movable member (movable production device)
860 Second upper movable member (movable production device)
900 1st central movable production member (movable production device)
910 Second central movable production member (movable production device)
920 Third central movable production member (movable production device)
930 4th central movable production member (movable production device)

Claims (2)

Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game in which the identification information is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In the game machine
A game control means that comprehensively controls the game,
An effect control means that controls the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means,
It is provided with a movable effect device capable of executing an effect operation that is controlled by the effect control means and operates a movable effect member according to the progress of the game.
The game control means
With the end of the variation display, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control means, and at the same time,
A fanfare command is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the special game state.
Information can be retained even in a power failure state, and the game can be resumed based on the information retained when the power failure is restored.
The effect control means
It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the recovery from the power failure.
The game control means
If a power failure occurs during the execution of the game, the game is interrupted, and if the power failure is restored, the game is restarted.
The effect control means
If the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, and the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the recovery of the power failure is completed by the time the stop command is received, the stop command is used. After the reception of, the effect of the movable effect device is set to be in an operable state.
When the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game, which is the special result, the initial operation of the movable effect device started with the recovery of the power failure is from the reception of the stop command to the fanfare command. A gaming machine characterized in that, if it is completed before the reception, the movable production device is put into an operable state in which the production operation of the movable production device is possible after the reception of the fanfare command . Equipped with an operation means equipped with an operation unit that accepts operations from the player,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operating means is configured to be able to operate the operating unit under the control of the effect control means .